JP2024161091A - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming machine with unprecedented entertainment value.
[Solution] The device is provided with a control means capable of executing the actual game after executing a pseudo game in which no game value can be awarded when a second lottery result is derived in a specified game, the control means being capable of executing the actual game when a first lottery result is derived in a specific game, the performance execution means being capable of executing a second performance corresponding to the second lottery result during the actual game of the specified game and when identification information is not displayed in a frozen state on the variable display means, and the first performance corresponding to the first lottery result being executed during the actual game of the specific game and when identification information is not displayed in a frozen state on the variable display means, and the determination means being capable of determining that there is a higher probability of awarding a specific benefit when the second lottery result is derived in the specified game than when the first lottery result is derived in the specific game.
[Selection] Figure 29

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

An example of this type of gaming machine is a slot machine. For example, slot machines typically have a normal gaming state in which it is difficult to increase the gaming media held in hand, and an advantageous gaming state in which it is easier to increase the gaming media held in hand by increasing the probability of winning a small prize.
In addition, in recent slot machines, when certain conditions are met, it is known that advantageous gaming states such as RT (Replay Time), which increases the winning rate of a replay role, AT (Assist Time), which assists in the winning of small roles and replay roles, and ART (Assist Replay Time), which increases the winning rate of a replay role and also assists in the winning of small roles and replay roles, are generated (Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-153724 A

However, there was room for improvement in conventional gaming machines.

In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine of the present invention comprises a lottery means capable of deriving one of a plurality of lottery results including a first lottery result and a second lottery result, a determination means capable of determining whether to award a specific benefit based on the lottery result derived by the lottery means, a variable display means capable of displaying a static display of identification information that is variably displayed in a manner based on the lottery result derived by the lottery means in a main game in which a game value can be awarded, a control means capable of executing the main game after executing a pseudo game in which the game value cannot be awarded when the second lottery result is derived in a specified game, and a control means for displaying a first play corresponding to the first lottery result during the pseudo game of the specified game and in a state in which identification information is not statically displayed by the variable display means. and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance corresponding to the second lottery result, the control means being capable of executing the main game when the first lottery result is derived in the specific game, the performance execution means being capable of executing a second performance corresponding to the second lottery result during the main game of the specified game and in a state in which the identification information is not displayed in a static state by the variable display means, and the first performance corresponding to the first lottery result being executed during the main game of the specific game and in a state in which the identification information is not displayed in a static state by the variable display means, and the determination means being capable of determining that a specific benefit is awarded with a higher probability when the second lottery result is derived in the specified game than when the first lottery result is derived in the specific game.

1 is a schematic front view showing the appearance of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a control configuration of the gaming machine of the first embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the transition of a game state in the gaming machine of the first embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a lottery table used when determining the ceiling number of games in the main control device in the gaming machine of the first embodiment. A figure to explain the transition of the game state during the AT state in the gaming machine of the first embodiment. 13 is a diagram for explaining the additional lottery during the AT state in the gaming machine of the first embodiment. This is a table to explain the additional lottery during the AT state in variant example 1 of the first embodiment. A figure showing a presentation image on the main display when an additional lottery is held during the AT state in variant example 1 of the first embodiment. A figure showing a presentation image on the main display when an additional lottery is held during the AT state in variant example 1 of the first embodiment. This is a chart to explain the probability of executing the push order navigation when the push order bell role is won during the AT state in variant example 2 of the first embodiment. A figure to explain the transition of the game state during the AT state in variant example 3 of the first embodiment. A figure to explain the transition of the game state during the AT state in variant example 4 of the first embodiment. A diagram to explain the transition of the game state during the CZ state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. A flowchart to explain the CZ state transition lottery processing in the main control device in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. A timing chart to explain the transition of probability states in response to a transition of the CZ state in a gaming machine of the second embodiment. A chart to explain the probability of promotion to a CZ high probability state and the probability of demotion to a CZ low probability state in a gaming machine of the second embodiment. A table to explain the winning probability of the CZ state and the winning probability of the second CZ state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. A chart to explain the probability of adding the number of games to the number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. A figure showing a presentation image on the main display when an additional lottery is held for the number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. A figure showing a presentation image on the main display during the second CZ high probability state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. A figure showing the presentation image on the main display during a CZ overlap high probability state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. A diagram to explain the notification control of the probability state of the CZ state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. 13 is a timing chart for explaining the input state of the stop button, the rotation state of the reels, and the content of the presentation on the main display when a freeze game is executed in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. 13 is a table for explaining the probability of selecting a freeze time in a freeze game in a gaming machine of a third embodiment. 13 is a diagram for explaining the selection probability of the notification mode during freeze play in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. A figure showing a presentation image on the main display when transitioning from freeze game to main game in a gaming machine of the third embodiment. A figure showing a presentation image on the main display when transitioning from freeze game to main game in variant example 1 of the third embodiment. A figure showing an effect image on the main display when a button effect is executed during freeze play in variant example 2 of the third embodiment. 13 is a timing chart for explaining the rotation state of the reels and the contents of the presentation on the main display device when a pseudo game is executed once during a freeze game in the third modified example of the third embodiment. 13 is a timing chart for explaining the rotation state of the reels and the contents of the presentation on the main display device when a pseudo game is executed twice during a freeze game in variant example 3 of the third embodiment. 13 is a diagram for explaining the probability of selecting a pseudo game pattern when a pseudo game is executed twice during a freeze game in variant example 3 of the third embodiment. A timing chart to explain the transition of the game state when a CZ state occurs in a gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. A table to explain the lottery probability for transition to the CZ state in a gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. This is a timing chart to explain the transition of the game state when a special replay role is won during the CZ state in a gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, resulting in a transition to a pseudo bonus state. A figure showing the presentation image on the main display when a special replay role is won during the CZ state in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. A figure showing the presentation image on the main display when a normal replay role is won during the CZ state in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. This is a timing chart to explain the transition of the game state when a rare role is won during the CZ state in a gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, resulting in a transition to a pseudo bonus state. A figure showing the presentation image on the main display when a rare role is won during the CZ state in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. This is a table to explain the probability of selecting a pseudo bonus state during the premonition period in the CZ state in a gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. 13 is a diagram for explaining the control contents of the instruction presentation that indicates a special symbol combination in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. A diagram for explaining the control contents of the fake instruction presentation during the premonition period in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. A figure for explaining the transition of the game state in a gaming machine of the fifth embodiment. A diagram for explaining the results of the lottery for transition to the AT state when a bonus state is won in a gaming machine of the fifth embodiment. A diagram for explaining the results of the lottery for transition to the AT state and the results of the lottery for additional bonuses for each game during the bonus state in a gaming machine of the fifth embodiment. A timing chart for explaining the transition of the game state and the content of the presentation on the main display when the AT state transition lottery is won during the bonus state in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment. A figure showing the presentation image of the main display when the bonus state in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment ends or continues. A figure showing the presentation image of the main display when the AT state in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment ends or continues. This is a timing chart for explaining the transition of the game state and the content of the presentation on the main display when a bonus role is won during an AT state in which a presentation corresponding to a bonus state is being executed in a gaming machine of the fifth embodiment. A figure showing a presentation image on the main display when a bonus role is won during an AT state in which a presentation corresponding to the AT state is being executed in a gaming machine of the fifth embodiment. A figure showing a presentation image on the main display when a bonus role is won during an AT state in which a presentation corresponding to the AT state is being executed in a gaming machine of the fifth embodiment.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
Here, a slot machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

First Embodiment
A first embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.
The slot machine 1 is installed in an amusement park or the like.
As shown in Figures 1 and 2, the slot machine 1 is equipped with a front door 1a, a bet button 2a, a return button 2c, a performance button 2d, an upper performance button 2f, a medal insertion slot 2, a start lever 3, a reel 4, a stop button 5, a display window 6, a medal payout device 7, a medal payout outlet 7b, a main display 8, a sub-display 17, a speaker 9, a front panel 19, a lamp 11, a navigation lamp 12, an advantageous zone lamp 13, a probability setting device 14, a display decorative frame 15, a drum unit 4d, an external output terminal 18, a main control device 10, and a sub-control device 20.

The main control unit 10 and the sub-control unit 20 each have a memory unit and a control unit, and are devices capable of various calculation processes and various controls, and are included in the concept of a computer. Each memory unit has a storage device such as a semiconductor memory element that stores programs, information, etc. necessary for the operation of the slot machine 1. Each control unit has a CPU, etc. Each control unit realizes the various functions of this first embodiment by appropriately reading and executing various programs, etc. stored in each memory unit.

[Front view of the gaming machine]
As shown in FIG. 1, a slot machine 1 is provided with a front door 1a at its front.
The front door 1a is pivotally attached to one side (left side as seen from the front) of a main body (not shown) that is disposed behind the front door 1a and attached to an island equipment (not shown), and is configured to be able to be opened and closed forward in a single-opening manner. Note that, hereinafter, the left and right directions are shown when the slot machine 1 is viewed from the front side.

A main display 8 is disposed at the center of the upper part of the front door 1a in the left-right direction when the slot machine 1 is viewed from the front side. The main display 8 is configured with a liquid crystal display or the like capable of displaying a plurality of pieces of information, such as information related to effects (effect images), as will be described later, and constitutes a display means.
A display decorative frame 15 having an opening in the center is disposed above the front door 1a and in front of the main display 8, and the main display 8 is disposed with its display surface facing forward through the opening of the display decorative frame 15.

A speaker 9 is disposed on each of the left and right sides of the main display 8, and is capable of outputting, for example, sound effects corresponding to the effects displayed on the main display 8.
In addition, lamps 11 consisting of LEDs or the like are provided on each of the left and right sides of the main display 8, and are capable of outputting, for example, light when a winning combination is achieved or light of an illumination mode corresponding to the effects displayed on the main display 8.

An upper performance button 2f, which is exemplified as an operation means (performance operation means), is provided on the right side of the main display 8.
The upper performance button 2f is a push button that moves in the forward and backward directions, and the pushing operation of the upper performance button 2f is detected by a non-contact sensor or the like and output as operation information of the upper performance button 2f to the sub-controller 20. In addition, a light-emitting source (not shown) consisting of an LED or the like is provided inside the upper performance button 2f, and the light emitted by the light-emitting source can notify that the operation of the upper performance button 2f is valid.

A flat front panel 19 having decorations and various function indications on its surface is disposed in the vertical center of the front door 1a of the slot machine 1.
Behind the front panel 19, there is disposed a drum unit 4d having a reel 4 as a variable display means.
Further, in the approximate center of the front panel 19, a display window 6 made of a light-transmitting material is formed, through which the symbols on the reels 4 can be seen from the front.

The reels 4 are composed of a left reel 4a, a center reel 4b, and a right reel 4c arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and the rotation axis of each of the reels 4a to 4c extends in the left-right direction, and the rotation center is set to be the same. The reels 4 (4a to 4c) have continuous patterns (identification information) on the periphery, and these patterns are configured to be identifiable from outside the machine through the display window 6, and as the reels 4 rotate in one direction, the patterns can be displayed in a variable manner, for example, from top to bottom, within the display window 6. Each of the reels 4a to 4c shows multiple patterns (for example, 20), and the types of patterns are, for example, "replay,""watermelon,""cherry,""bell,""7," etc.
The shape of the reel 4 is not limited to this, and for example, the number of symbols on the periphery may be other than 20.

Above the display window 6 on the front panel 19, navigation lamps 12a, 12b, and 12c capable of indicating the stopping sequence of the stop buttons 5, which will be described later, are disposed in correspondence with the reels 4a, 4b, and 4c.
In addition, a favorable zone lamp 13, for example, composed of an LED, is disposed on the lower left side of the display window 6 on the front panel 19. The favorable zone lamp 13 is controlled to light up during a favorable zone (described later). Note that, instead of the favorable zone lamp 13, the slot machine 1 may control to light up, for example, the "dot" portion of a 7-segment display (also called "7-seg") constituting a payout number display section that displays the number of medals paid out.

A sub-display 17 is disposed on the front panel 19 to the right of the display window 6 (reels 4).
The sub-display 17 is composed of a liquid crystal display or the like capable of displaying multiple pieces of information, such as information relating to the performance (performance image) as described below, and constitutes a display means.
The sub-display 17 has a smaller display area than the main display 8, but is disposed closer to the reel 4 than the main display 8, making it easy to visually recognize the displayed image while watching the reel 4 rotate and stop.
In addition, the sub-display 17 is constructed of a touch panel type display, and enables the player to perform various operations related to the presentation content by touching the screen, such as a switching operation for switching between presentation modes and a switching operation to an explanatory image of the game content.

A step protruding forward is formed below the front panel 19, and on the upper surface of the step are arranged a coin insertion slot 2, a bet button 2a which is an example of an operating means, and a performance button 2d which is an example of an operating means (performance operating means).
The medal insertion slot 2 is a portion where a player inserts a medal (game medium). Inside the medal insertion slot 2, a medal selector 2b (medal detection means) which is a sensor or the like that detects a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 2 is provided.
The bet button 2a is a pressable button that allows the player to input the number of bets required to start a game, and allows the player to input the maximum number of bets permitted by the slot machine 1 with one operation.

The performance button 2d is a push button that moves up and down, and the pressing of the performance button 2d is detected by a non-contact sensor or the like and output to the sub-controller 20 as operation information of the performance button 2d. In addition, a light-emitting source (not shown) such as an LED is provided inside the performance button 2d, and the light emitted by the light-emitting source can notify that the operation of the corresponding performance button 2d is valid. The performance button 2d is disposed in a position closer to the reel 4 than the upper performance button 2f described above.

A start lever 3, a return button 2c, and a stop button 5, which is exemplified as an operating means (stop operating means), are disposed on the front surface of the stepped portion.
The start lever 3 is a lever that the player operates to start the game. After the number of bets is input, the start lever 3 becomes active and the game can start.
The return button 2c is a push button that moves back and forth, and is operated to cancel the set bet number or to pay out medals stored as credit medals.
The stop buttons 5 are buttons for stopping the spinning reels 4 and are composed of push-type buttons that move back and forth, with the left stop button 5a, center stop button 5b, and right stop button 5c being arranged at predetermined intervals horizontally corresponding to the left reel 4a, center reel 4b, and right reel 4c.
In addition, each stop button 5 is provided with a light source (not shown) such as an LED, and the light color changes (from red to blue) to indicate that the operation of each stop button 5 is valid.

Below the front door 1a of the slot machine 1, there is a medal payout outlet 7b through which medals paid out from the medal payout device 7 are ejected.

[Block diagram showing the control configuration of the gaming machine]
FIG. 2 shows a block diagram of a control system in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment.
2, the slot machine 1 is equipped with a main control device 10 which performs the drawing of winning roles and the control of the progress of the game, and a sub-control device 20 which is configured to be able to communicate with the main control device 10 and performs various presentation controls based on control information from the main control device 10. The transmission of control information between the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20 is limited to one direction only, from the main control device 10 to the sub-control device 20, to prevent the input of unauthorized signals from the sub-control device 20 to the main control device 10.

The main control device 10 is connected to the bet button 2a, medal selector 2b, return button 2c, start lever 3, stop button 5, probability setting device 14 (setting means), external output terminal 18, medal payout device 7, drum unit 4d and advantageous zone lamp 13 by communication cables, and is capable of controlling each device. The main control device 10 also includes a memory unit (storage means) and a control unit.

The probability setting device 14, as a setting means, changes the probability of winning in a special game state (e.g., a pseudo bonus state) into multiple stages (e.g., six stages), thereby allowing the degree of advantage for the player to be set in multiple stages, and the main control device 10 performs a process of setting the probability of winning in the special game state to one of multiple probability values with different probabilities based on the probability setting operation in the probability setting device 14.
The setting values set by the probability setting device 14 are: setting 1 has the lowest probability value, the higher the number, the higher the probability value, and setting 6 has the highest probability value. Therefore, setting 1 is the most disadvantageous setting to the player (the setting with the lowest degree of advantage), the higher the number, the more advantageous it is to the player, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting to the player (the setting with the highest degree of advantage).

In addition, the probability of winning the special game state may be controlled by a fixed probability value without being affected by the setting value of the probability setting device 14.
In addition, the probability of transitioning to the CZ state or the AT state may be changed depending on the setting value in the probability setting device 14, making it possible to change the player's degree of advantage in multiple stages.
In addition to the special game state, the probability of winning a predetermined small prize (for example, a bell prize) may be made variable in multiple stages (for example, six stages).

The external output terminal 18 outputs information related to playing on the slot machine 1 to a management device (not shown) or a calling device (not shown) installed in the gaming establishment, and outputs information under the control of the main control device 10 to collect various data such as the number of games played on the slot machine 1, the number of medals inserted, the number of medals paid out, the number of times a game state advantageous to the player occurs (for example, the pseudo bonus state and AT state described below) and the transition period.

The drum unit 4d is a device integrally including the reels 4a to 4c and stepping motors (not shown) for rotating the reels 4a to 4c.
The medal payout device 7 has a medal storage section (not shown) that collects medals inserted into the medal selector 2b as medals before being paid out, and is a device that pays out the medals stored in the medal storage section to a medal payout outlet 7b. The medal payout device 7 is equipped with a sensor that detects the paid-out medals.
The medal selector 2 b is provided downstream of the medal insertion port 2 and is equipped with a sensor that detects medals inserted through the medal insertion port 2 .

The memory unit of the main control device 10 stores various information such as game programs related to the game, tables for drawing lots for minor winnings and AT states, etc.
Furthermore, the main control device 10 operates using a control unit and a storage unit in which programs are stored, thereby carrying out processes related to the progress of play on the slot machine 1 .

The main control device 10 performs processes such as starting the game and sampling random numbers from a random number generator (not shown) based on a signal from the start lever 3. It then performs lottery processing for winning combinations based on the sampled random numbers. It also performs random number generation processing, for example by updating the random numbers at predetermined times, according to the control program in the storage unit, and performs lottery processing for transitioning to a pseudo bonus state, lottery processing for transitioning during an AT state, lottery processing for adding extra points during an AT state, etc., based on the generated random numbers.

That is, the main control device 10 is provided with a lottery means for selecting (determining) whether or not to award a special benefit such as a small win, a pseudo bonus state, or an AT state in response to the execution of a game.
In addition, the selection pattern using random numbers may be other than the patterns mentioned above, and the hand may be selected based on random numbers generated by software, and the transition to a pseudo bonus state or AT state, or additional selections, may be performed based on random numbers generated by a random number generator, or all selections may be performed using random numbers generated by software or random numbers generated by a random number generator.

The main control device 10 also controls the rotation of the reels 4 based on a signal from the start lever 3. The main control device 10 detects the rotational position of each of the reels 4a, 4b, 4c based on signals from sensors (not shown) provided on each of the reels 4a, 4b, 4c, and is therefore able to grasp the rotational position of the symbols on each of the reels 4a, 4b, 4c. Then, based on a signal from the stop button 5, it performs control to stop the desired symbol within the display window 6.

In addition, the main control device 10 realizes the game play of the slot machine 1 by controlling the game progress process involving internal lottery processing, management of various information stored in the memory unit, and devices such as the medal payout device 7 in response to the operation of the operation unit such as the start lever 3.

The sub-controller 20 is connected to the performance button 2d, upper performance button 2f, speaker 9, main display 8, lamp 11, navigation lamp 12, and sub-display 17 via communication cables, and is capable of communicating with them. The sub-controller 20 controls these devices in response to control information from the main control unit 10. The sub-controller 20 also includes a memory unit and a control unit.

The memory unit of the sub-controller 20 stores various information such as programs related to performance, performance image data, audio data, etc.
The sub-controller 20 operates by a control unit and a storage unit in which a program is stored, and performs processing such as effects synchronized with play on the slot machine 1 in response to commands (control information) from the main controller 10. For example, it controls the main display 8, the lamps 11, the speaker 9, etc. to output effect images and sound effects that indicate a transition in the game state, and lamp effects.

In addition, the sub-control device 20 is capable of controlling the switching timing of each effect based on signals from the effect button 2d, the upper effect button 2f, and the touch panel of the sub-display 17.
Either or both of the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20 constitute the special game state control means, special game state switching control means, change lottery control means, bonus awarding means, notification control means, game control means, extended lottery control means, probability control means, duplicate notification control means, state notification control means, lottery means, game control means, freeze game control means, specific notification control means, special game state occurrence determination means, first game control means, second game control means, special game state right awarding means, game result derivation means, specific game state control means, presentation control means, bonus lottery means, notification change control means, special presentation control means, second special game state control means, post-game instruction presentation control means, mid-game instruction presentation control means, and bonus awarding presentation control means in the present invention.

Such a slot machine 1 is configured to be able to execute slot machine games such as those described below under the control of the main control device 10.

At the start of a game, medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 2, or the number of bets is set from credit medals by operating the bet button 2a.
Then, when the number of bets reaches a predetermined number (for example, three coins), one of the conditions for starting the game is met, and the player enters a state in which the player has the right to play one game and is therefore able to start the game.

In this state where the game can be started, the operation of the start lever 3 is valid. In this valid state, when the start lever 3 is tilted, all of the conditions for starting the game are met, the game starts, and the reels 4a to 4c on which multiple symbols are displayed start to move, and an internal lottery process is executed to determine in advance, before the reels 4 stop, the lottery results of the current game for multiple roles such as replay roles, small roles, and bonus roles (including misses), as well as for transitions to a pseudo bonus state and an AT state.
In the internal lottery process, a winning combination for the current game is determined by lottery from among a plurality of winning combinations based on a predetermined winning probability. For example, a lottery result such as a replay combination or a bell combination is derived by lottery.

Furthermore, even if the main control device 10 receives a signal from the start lever 3, if the elapsed time from the start of rotation of the reel 4 in the previous game has not yet passed a predetermined time (e.g., 4.1 seconds), the main control device 10 performs a limiting control to limit the number of games executed per unit time (e.g., one minute) to within a predetermined number (e.g., 14 times) by temporarily waiting (inserting a waiting time) before starting rotation of the reel 4, thereby delaying the start of rotation of the reel 4. In other words, the main control device 10 is provided with a game number limiting means capable of limiting the number of games executed per unit time to within a predetermined number. With this control, the shortest execution time required for one game is set to a predetermined time (e.g., 4.1 seconds).
In addition, the period for monitoring the above-mentioned shortest execution time may be set based on a point other than the point at which the reel 4 starts to rotate between games. For example, it may be based on the point at which the stop button 5 is activated, or any point may be used as the base as long as it is possible to monitor the number of games per unit time.

Each of the reels 4a to 4c is an example of a display means, and a number of symbols (replay, bell, watermelon, cherry, BAR, 7) are displayed in a predetermined arrangement on the periphery of each of the reels 4a to 4c. The rotation speed gradually increases from a stopped state, and then reaches a steady state where the reels rotate at a constant speed.
When the reels reach this steady rotation, the stop buttons 5a to 5c provided corresponding to the reels 4a to 4c become operable by pressing them.

When each of the stop buttons 5a to 5c is pressed in this state, the reels 4a to 4c are controlled to stop with a combination of symbols permitted by the timing of the operation and the lottery result of the internal lottery process.
The stop control (pulling-in stop control) of each reel 4a to 4c has a pull-in range set for each, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of symbols in the reverse rotation direction (upward) from the symbol at the time the stop operation is performed can be pulled in, and only any of the symbols within this pull-in range can be stopped on a pay line.

In the stopped state, three consecutive symbols displayed in the vertical direction on each of the reels 4a to 4c stop (stop display) so that they face outside the machine through the display window 6, and the presence or absence of a win is determined based on the state of the stop display at this time.
Winning is determined based on the combination of symbols that stop on the middle winning line that connects the middle symbols of each reel 4 in the display window 6. Therefore, for example, even if predetermined symbols line up on a diagonal line, the winning is determined based on the combination of symbols that actually stop in the middle row at that time and are not lined up.

Winning combinations such as small wins and replays are determined based on the combination of symbols on such winning lines.
Small roles include, for example, bell, watermelon, and cherry.

There are two bell roles, each with a different combination of corresponding symbols. For example, there can be a common bell role with the corresponding symbol combinations of "bell, replay, bell" in the order of "left reel 4a, middle reel 4b, right reel 4c" on the winning line (and so on), and a push order bell role with the corresponding symbol combinations of "bell, bell, bell".

The common bell role is a minor role in which the corresponding symbol combination ("bell, replay, bell") stops regardless of the operation sequence (called the push order) of the stop buttons 5a to 5c, while the push order bell role is a minor role in which the corresponding symbol combination ("bell, bell, bell") stops when a specific push order is followed.

Furthermore, the push order bell role has six push order bell roles 1 to 6, in which the corresponding symbol combination ("Bell Bell Bell") is displayed as a stop by operating the stop buttons 5a to 5c in one of six push orders (for example, "5a → 5b → 5c", "5c → 5b → 5a", etc.). When the stop buttons 5a to 5c are operated in five other push orders (push orders other than the specific push orders), the corresponding symbol combination ("Bell Bell Bell") is not displayed as a stop, and instead, another symbol combination such as "Bell Bell Replay" (called a "Bell Spill") is displayed as a stop.

When the push order bell role is won, regardless of which stop button 5 is operated second or third, as long as only the first stop button 5 is operated in a specific push order, the reels 4 may be controlled to stop so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the push order bell role stops. Also, the number of push order bells is not limited to six, and three push order bells 1 to 3 may be provided.

The watermelon role is a minor role (rare role) where the corresponding symbol combination is "watermelon, watermelon, watermelon", and there are two types: a weak watermelon role where "watermelon, watermelon, watermelon" stops on the upper line or lower line, and a strong watermelon role where "watermelon, watermelon, watermelon" stops on a right-upward line or a right-downward line.
The cherry role is a minor role (rare role) whose corresponding symbol combination is "Cherry-ANY-ANY", and there are two types of cherry roles: a weak cherry role in which "Cherry" stops on the top or bottom row of the left reel 4a, and a strong cherry role in which "Cherry" stops on the middle row of the left reel 4a.

There are two replay roles with different corresponding symbol combinations, a normal replay role (hereinafter referred to as a replay role) with a corresponding symbol combination of "replay, replay, replay" and a chance replay role (chance role) with a corresponding symbol combination of "replay, bell, bell".
"Replay Bell Bell" (Chance Eye) is a combination of symbols that stops to be displayed when a Chance Replay symbol is won, and along with the Watermelon and Cherry symbols, it is set as a so-called rare symbol with a relatively low probability of winning in the internal lottery process, and among them, the weak Watermelon and Weak Cherry symbols are set as weak rare symbols, and symbols other than the Weak Watermelon and Weak Cherry symbols are set as strong rare symbols.

In addition, the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20 can generate an AT (assist time) as a game state related to the push order bell role. When the push order bell role is won, the AT is a state in which the push order of the winning push order bell role is notified (push order navigation is executed) by the main display 8 and the navigation lamp 12.
In other words, the sub-control device 20 constitutes a notification control means capable of executing control to notify operation information (specific operation information) for deriving a specific result ("Bell Bell Bell") as the result of the game.
Therefore, the occurrence of the AT allows the player to easily win medals, and is controlled during the pseudo bonus state and AT state described below.
In addition, the navigation lamp 12 may be configured to be directly drive-controlled by the main control device 10 without going through the sub-control device 20.

Based on the symbol combinations as described above, the winning of the small prize, replay prize, and bonus prize is judged (judgment means), and when the result of the judgment is that the symbol combination is a combination of symbols corresponding to each of the above, a win is achieved and a game value according to the achievement of each win is awarded.
For example, when a combination of symbols corresponding to a minor prize such as a bell, a cherry, or a watermelon stops, it is determined that a minor prize has been won, and the medal payout device 7 is driven and controlled to pay out a predetermined number of medals through the medal payout outlet 7b.

Specifically, in the case of a bell role (common bell role, push order bell role), when a combination of corresponding symbols is stopped and displayed, eight medals are paid out.
In addition, when the push order bell role is won, if the stop buttons 5a to 5c are operated in a push order other than the specific push order (five push orders), no medals will be paid out.
When the push order bell role is won, if the stop buttons 5a to 5c are operated in a push order other than the specific push order (five different push orders), fewer than eight medals (for example, one medal) may be paid out, or fewer than eight medals (for example, one medal) may be paid out in some push orders other than the specific push order, and no medals may be paid out in other push orders.
In addition, the probability of winning the bell role is set so that the number of medals held by the player increases during the AT state described below.

In addition, when a combination of symbols corresponding to a weak watermelon role and a strong watermelon role is stopped and displayed, two medals are paid out.
In addition, when a combination of symbols corresponding to a weak cherry role and a strong cherry role is stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out.
The number of medals paid out when a combination of symbols corresponding to each winning combination is stopped and displayed may be other than the above-mentioned number.

In addition, the replay role and chance replay role are determined by the stopped display of the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay role and chance replay role, and it is possible to play the next game with the same number of bets as the number of bets set in the previous game without inserting medals (without setting the number of bets).

In addition, the probability of winning each small symbol and replay symbol is set in the following relationship for each setting value: Bell symbol > Replay symbol > Weak Cherry symbol > Weak Watermelon symbol > Chance Replay symbol > Strong Cherry symbol > Strong Watermelon symbol, in other words, the Bell symbol is set to be the most likely to win and the Strong Watermelon symbol is set to be the least likely to win.
The relationship between the winning probabilities of each role may be other than that described above.

[Transition of gaming state in gaming machine]
Next, the transition of the gaming state in the slot machine 1 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In the slot machine 1 in this first embodiment, it is possible to play a 3 bet game in which three medals are spent (three bets) to play the game, and Figure 3 shows the transition of the game state when a 3 bet game is played, which is realized by the control of the main control device 10.
In this first embodiment, the game state transition control is performed only when a 3 bet game is executed, and the game state is not transitioned in other games (e.g., 2 bet games). However, it is also possible to allow the game execution itself only when 3 bets are placed, and prohibit the game execution for other bet numbers.
Hereinafter, the 3-bet game will be referred to as the "game."

As shown in FIG. 3, the game of the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment is executed in multiple game states, including a normal game state, a CZ state, a pseudo bonus state, and an AT state. The main control device 10 is capable of controlling the transition from one game state to another game state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition.

Furthermore, the main control device 10 of the first embodiment is provided with a zone control means capable of controlling the game zone to either a normal zone or an advantageous zone, separately from the above-mentioned game state.
The normal zone is a game zone in which push order navigation is not executed, and begins when the next game starts after the advantageous zone ends, and ends when the advantageous zone transition conditions are met.
In the normal zone, the favorable zone lamp 13 is controlled to be turned off.

In addition, in the normal zone, when the conditions for transition to the advantageous zone are met, for example, when a predetermined role (e.g., a bell role) is won in an internal lottery, it is determined that the player will transition to the advantageous zone.
In addition, the transition condition of the AT state may be established based on the winning of a predetermined rare role in the normal zone, and in this case, it is preferable to transition to the AT state after the establishment of the advantageous zone transition condition. Therefore, since the push order navigation will be executed after the establishment of the advantageous zone transition condition, the push order navigation will not be performed in the normal zone.
Furthermore, when the main control device 10 is reset, it is controlled to the normal section.

The advantageous zone is a play zone in which push order navigation may be executed, and is a play zone that is more advantageous to the player than the normal zone because push order navigation may be executed.
In addition, the advantageous zone begins when the next game is started after the advantageous zone transition condition is satisfied in the normal zone, and ends when a predetermined advantageous zone end condition is satisfied.
In the favorable zone, the favorable zone lamp 13 is controlled to be lit.
In addition, after transitioning to the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone lamp 13 may start to light up when the game state (e.g., pseudo-bonus state) is reached in which the number of medals held by the player increases as a result of executing the push order navigation.

In addition, the advantageous zone transitions to the normal zone when the end condition of the advantageous zone is met based on the end of a specific game state among the multiple game states mentioned above.
Examples of conditions for the end of the advantageous period include the end of a pseudo-bonus state that does not transition to an AT state or the end of the AT state.
In addition, the conditions for the end of the advantageous zone may be set not to be met at a part of the end of the pseudo bonus state in which the AT state does not transition.

In addition to the above, the conditions for ending the advantageous zone also include when the number of games played in one advantageous zone (advantageous zone game number) reaches the upper limit number of games (e.g., 3,000 games), and when the net increase in the number of medals (difference in number of medals), which indicates the increase in the number of medals held by the player in one advantageous zone, exceeds the upper limit number (e.g., 2,400 medals).The end of the advantageous zone also causes the game state to transition to the normal game state.The advantageous zone ends when at least one of the above three types of ending conditions is met.

In particular, the reaching of the upper limit of the number of games played in the advantageous zone (upper limit number) and the reaching of the upper limit of the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous zone are provided as restriction functions (so-called limiters) to restrict the amount of medals acquired by the player, making it possible to suppress gambling.
The main control device 10 counts the number of games played up to the maximum number of games only for normal games, and does not count any pseudo games that are executed separately from normal games as part of the above game count, as will be described in more detail below.

In other words, the main control device 10 is equipped with a counting means that counts the number of times that normal games (number of games in the advantageous zone) are played in the advantageous zone, but does not count the number of times that pseudo games are played.
Furthermore, the main control device 10 as a zone control means transitions the game zone to a normal zone when the counting result by the counting means indicates the upper limit game number (specific number of times) in the advantageous zone.

Also, in this first embodiment, for example, the operation of the above-mentioned limiting function during the AT state is determined in advance, and the period from this determination until the limiter is activated is set as the ending period, and a presentation (completion presentation) is executed to congratulate the player in advance on the fact that the advantageous state has continued to the upper limit.
Furthermore, in the first embodiment, although details will be described later, pseudo games are made impossible to execute during the ending period, so as to prevent the player from having unnecessary expectations.

In addition, in the slot machine 1 of this first embodiment, transition control is performed between the normal zone, which is an area where the push order navigation cannot be performed, and the advantageous zone, which is an area where the push order navigation can be performed, based on the execution of the game. In the initial state of the slot machine 1, the slot machine 1 is controlled to the normal zone, and when a predetermined transition condition is met (e.g., winning the bell role) during execution of the game in the normal zone, a transition to the advantageous zone is performed.

(Normal gameplay state)
The normal gaming state is the gaming state in which the slot machine 1 remains when the main controller 10 is reset, and is a disadvantageous state for the player.
As shown in Fig. 3, the main control device 10 performs a lottery process for transition to the CZ state, pseudo bonus state, and AT state during the normal gaming state. Depending on the specifications of the slot machine 1, it may not be possible to directly transition from the normal gaming state to the AT state.
In the normal gaming state, such as when the main control device 10 of the slot machine 1 is reset, the gaming area is controlled to the normal area, and when the conditions for transition to the advantageous area during the normal gaming state are met, the gaming area transitions from the normal area to the advantageous area.

In addition, the normal game state is set to a normal probability state and a high probability state, and in each game, the probability of transitioning to the pseudo bonus state is controlled so that the high probability state is higher than the normal probability state.

The transition of the probability state is controlled so that, for example, there is a 30% probability of transitioning from the normal probability state to the high probability state when a weak watermelon or weak cherry role is won. On the other hand, as a specified fall condition, there is a 5% probability of transitioning from the high probability state to the normal probability state when, for example, a replay role is won, a bell role is won, or a miss occurs.

The winning probability of the pseudo bonus state is set at, for example, a 20% probability when a chance role or a strong cherry role is won in the normal probability state, and at a 50% probability when a chance role or a strong cherry role is won in the high probability state.
When the probability state changes from a normal probability state to a high probability state, the sub-control unit 20 controls the main display 8 to notify the user that the state is high probability. For example, if a stage in which the main character moves through a grassland is displayed during normal game play, the background of the stage is changed from a daytime background to an evening background to notify the user that the state is high probability.

However, instead of definitely changing the stage when a high probability state is reached, a stage change lottery is held with a predetermined probability (e.g., 30%) during the game in the high probability state, and the stage is changed only if the change lottery is won.
Also, even during a game in the normal probability state, a lottery for changing to a stage is held with a predetermined probability (2%), and if this change lottery is won, control is performed to change to a stage indicating a high probability state.

On the other hand, even when staying on a stage with an evening background, a lottery for changing to a daytime background is held, and control is performed so that in a game in a normal probability state, there is a relatively high probability (e.g., 20%) of winning the change lottery, and in a game in a high probability state, there is a relatively low probability (e.g., 5%) of winning the change lottery.
Therefore, even if the stage has an evening background, it does not necessarily mean that the player is staying in a high probability state; a stage with an evening background merely suggests a high probability state.

In addition, when the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is changed or when the main control device 10 is reset, after passing through the normal zone and transitioning to the advantageous zone, actual play can begin in the normal game state under the normal probability state; however, for each setting value in the probability setting device 14, the normal game state may be started in a high probability state with a predetermined probability.
In addition, during a high probability state, in addition to the pseudo bonus state, the probability of winning the CZ state or AT state may be increased.

In addition, during a game in a normal gaming state, a pseudo game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a game is executed that notifies the player of a transition to a predetermined gaming state (e.g., a pseudo bonus state).
In addition, a transition lottery for the above-mentioned benefits (CZ state, pseudo bonus state, AT state) may also be conducted based on pseudo play.

During the normal gaming state, an individual performance that is completed in one game is executed on the main display 8 or the sub-display 17 with a predetermined probability.
The individual effects are mainly executed to heighten the player's sense of anticipation, and include winning effects executed based on the results of the lottery for winning combinations in the main control device 10.
In addition, individual effects also include those that are executed based on the probability state at that time (normal probability state or high probability state), those that are executed to explain the game, and the like.
The winning effect is an effect that is executed mainly to notify the result of the lottery for a winning role, and displays an item that can notify the winning role (e.g., a rare role) together with the appearance of a specified character, or displays text information such as "Chance" or "Super Hot" indicating the expectation of the occurrence of a special privilege (pseudo bonus state, etc.) together with the appearance of a specified character, and displays an image according to the type of winning role and the result of the lottery regarding the granting of a special privilege triggered by the winning role (e.g., a rare role).

Transition process from normal game state to pseudo bonus state (arrow a1 in FIG. 3)
The number of games is counted by the execution of the game during the normal game state (advantageous zone), and when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number (special number: ceiling game number), a transition from the normal game state to a pseudo bonus state is made.
The ceiling number of games is determined when the game area transitions from the normal area to the advantageous area, and the ceiling number of games at that time is set each time the game area transitions to the advantageous area, as will be described in detail later.

In addition, when a game is played during the normal game state, a lottery is held to transition to the pseudo-bonus state when a specified combination is won, and if the transition lottery is won with a specified probability, a transition from the normal game state to the pseudo-bonus state is also made.

More specifically, the main control device 10 performs a lottery process for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state in advance based on the winning of a predetermined rare role as a specific lottery result. For example, the process for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state is performed with a predetermined probability (e.g., 20%) when a chance role or a strong cherry role is won.
The pseudo bonus state continues until a predetermined number of games have been played, during which a lottery for transition to the AT state is held. The pseudo bonus state will be described in detail later.

In addition, in the normal game state, the probability of entering the pseudo bonus state when a specified rare role is won can be changed according to the setting value in the probability setting device 14, which serves as a setting means. For example, when a strong cherry role is won, the probability of entering the pseudo bonus state is 10% at setting 1, 12% at setting 2, 14% at setting 3, 16% at setting 4, 18% at setting 5, and 20% at setting 6.

The transition to the pseudo bonus state, i.e., the decision as to whether or not to grant a bonus, may be made by a method other than playing a ceiling number of games or drawing a rare role by a drawing means. For example, the transition to the pseudo bonus state may be decided when a specific role (e.g., a bell role) has been won (or the number of times it has actually been won) reaches a specific number, and a drawing for the pseudo bonus state may be held at that point. Alternatively, a specific number of points may be added according to the drawing of the role, and the points added may be changeable according to the type of role won or the state in which the role is won, and the transition to the pseudo bonus state may be decided when a specific number of points are reached, or a drawing for the pseudo bonus state may be held at that point.

In addition, a pseudo bonus state may be generated during the AT state described below.
In addition, in the first embodiment, the winning combinations that trigger the pseudo bonus state are set to the chance combination and the strong cherry combination, but the pseudo bonus state may be drawn when other combinations are won.

During a specified period immediately before the number of games played reaches the ceiling number of games, and if the lottery for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state is won, a premonition effect (first specific effect) is executed on the main display 8 for a specified number of games (e.g., 18 games) before the transition to the pseudo bonus state to heighten the player's anticipation of the transition to the pseudo bonus state.

In other words, even if the main control unit 10 has determined in advance to transition to the pseudo bonus state, it does not transition to the pseudo bonus state immediately, but rather generates the pseudo bonus state after a predetermined number of games have been played from that point onwards, and the sub-control unit 20, based on the main control unit 10's determination in advance to generate the pseudo bonus state, controls the execution of this premonition effect as a premonition effect during the period of execution of a predetermined number of games prior to transitioning to the pseudo bonus state.
Therefore, when a transition to a pseudo-bonus state has been predetermined as the awarding of a bonus, the sub-control device 20 is capable of executing this premonition effect across multiple games during a predetermined period before the awarding of the bonus.

In addition, before the ceiling number of games is reached and when the pseudo-bonus state is determined by the transition lottery, a waiting period of a predetermined number of games (e.g., 12 games) is set in the period immediately before this premonition effect is executed, and this premonition effect is executed after the end of this waiting period.
During the waiting period, for example, the probability of an individual effect being executed is increased, so as to heighten the player's anticipation for the execution of the premonition effect.
Therefore, when transitioning to the pseudo bonus state, the transition occurs after a waiting period and execution of the actual premonition effect.

During this premonition effect, the main display 8 switches to an image of a stage with a different background from that during the normal game state, and an effect image is executed on the premonition stage in which the character that appears performs an action different from that during the normal game state. For example, an effect on the premonition stage in which the character advances through a cave is executed throughout multiple games. The effect content itself does not change even when one game ends. For example, even if the screen is switched due to the occurrence of various events in a specific game, the effect content itself, such as the character advancing through a cave, continues to be executed in the next game without changing. Therefore, this premonition effect is a series of effects executed across multiple games.
In addition, multiple patterns with different backgrounds, etc. are prepared for the premonition stage, and one of the patterns of the premonition stage is selected under the control of the sub-controller 20 depending on whether or not a win has been made in the pseudo-bonus state at that time.

In addition, when the number of times the game is executed is not about to reach the ceiling number of games, and when a rare role (e.g., a chance role) that triggers a transition to the pseudo bonus state is won but the lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus state is not won, a fake premonition effect (second specific effect) is executed on the main display 8 for a predetermined number of games (e.g., 18 games) to notify the player that they will not ultimately transition to the pseudo bonus state, just as when they win the pseudo bonus state.

In other words, the sub-controller 20 is capable of executing a fake premonition effect as a specific effect (second specific effect) across multiple games based on the establishment of specified conditions when the main controller 10 has not previously determined the transition to the pseudo bonus state.
Therefore, regardless of whether the main control unit 10 has previously decided to transition to a pseudo-bonus state, when a predetermined condition, such as winning a chance role, is met, the sub-control unit 20 is able to execute a specific effect (a real premonition effect or a fake premonition effect) across multiple games that can indicate whether or not a bonus will be awarded.

In addition, the fake premonition effect may be executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%) when a rare role that triggers a transition to the pseudo bonus state is won but the lottery for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state is not won, or it may be executed every time.
Furthermore, when executing the fake premonition effect at a time when the number of times the game is executed is not immediately before the ceiling number of games, it is preferable to execute the fake premonition effect in accordance with a period (zone) during which the preset ceiling number of games is likely to be selected.In this way, when the period during which the ceiling number of games is likely to be selected is reached, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation even if the game does not transition to a pseudo bonus state.

Also, when a fake premonition effect is executed based on the winning of a rare role, a fake waiting period of a predetermined number of games (e.g., 12 games) is set in the period immediately prior to the execution of the fake premonition effect, just as when a pseudo bonus state is won.
The real premonition effects and fake premonition effects are basically made up of a series of effects across multiple games in which the performance images (stages or characters that appear, etc.) are set in the same way, and by making the final content announced different, it is possible to keep the player's expectations captivated until the very end.

In addition, in the main premonition effect and the fake premonition effect, a notification is given as to whether or not the state will ultimately transition to a pseudo bonus state. In this case, the main display 8 executes a continuous effect (continuous effect) several games (e.g., two games) before the final game of the premonition effect. The continuous effect is executed, for example, as a battle effect consisting of an image of an ally character and an enemy character fighting for a predetermined number of games (e.g., three games).

In the continuous performance (battle performance), a performance image is executed in which a friendly character and an enemy character compete in a predetermined battle event for each game, and the performance content of each game is carried over to the next game. For example, if a given friendly character is in a disadvantageous situation in a predetermined game, a performance is executed to carry over that situation to the next game, and a performance is executed in which one of the characters ultimately wins.
In addition, in the continuous performance (battle performance), the type of friendly character that appears, the type of enemy character, and the type of battle event may be changed depending on whether or not a transition to a pseudo bonus state occurs.

In addition, the content of the battle between friendly characters and enemy characters in each game is set depending on whether or not there is a transition to a predetermined pseudo-bonus state. For example, when there is a transition to the pseudo-bonus state, it is set so that there are more games in which friendly characters have the advantage than when there is no transition.
In other words, the continuous effects are a series of effects that are executed over (across) a number of games.
In addition, a button effect may be executed in parallel with the continuous effect.

If a transition to the pseudo bonus state occurs (in the case of the real premonition effect), an image of the ally character ultimately winning is displayed to notify the transition to the pseudo bonus state, and if a transition to the pseudo bonus state does not occur (in the case of the fake premonition effect), an image of the ally character ultimately losing is displayed to notify the player that they will not transition to the pseudo bonus state.

In addition, instead of a continuous performance, a performance may be executed that is completed with only the final game of the main premonition performance and the fake premonition performance, and a notification regarding a transition to a pseudo bonus state may be given based on the result of that performance.
In addition, the real premonition effect and the fake premonition effect may be generated without executing the waiting period. In addition, the fake premonition effect may be generated without fail when a rare combination that is a trigger for transition to the pseudo bonus state is won, or may be generated with a predetermined probability.
In addition, after a rare winning combination is won, only the consecutive effects during the premonition effect may be executed to transition to a pseudo bonus state or the like.
The number of games for the real premonition effects and the fake premonition effects may be any number of games, or may be selectively determined from a number of numbers of games (e.g., 15 to 20 games).Similarly, the waiting period may be selectively determined from a number of numbers of games (e.g., 10 to 15 games), so that the waiting period can be varied.

The number of games that can be selected for the execution period of the real premonition effect and the fake premonition effect may be set to the same, but during the real premonition effect, it may be possible to select a number of games that would not be selected for the fake premonition effect. In this way, if the premonition effect ends after a small number of games that would be impossible for a fake premonition effect, or if the premonition effect continues for a large number of games that would be impossible for a fake premonition effect, the real premonition effect will be confirmed, making it possible to increase the player's sense of expectation.

・Transition process from normal game state to CZ state (arrow c1 in FIG. 3)
In the normal game state, the main control device 10 performs a lottery process for transitioning to the CZ state based on winning a specified rare role. For example, the transition process to the CZ state is performed with a specified probability (for example, 10%) when a strong watermelon role is won. The condition for transitioning to the CZ state is winning this transition lottery.

In addition, in order to heighten the player's anticipation of the transition to the CZ state, even if a specified rare combination is won and a transition to the CZ state is determined, the transition to the CZ state is not immediately made, and instead a continuous presentation of the CZ state (main continuous presentation) for a specified number of games (e.g., three games) to notify the player that they will eventually transition to the CZ state may be executed on the main display 8.

In addition, even if a player wins a specified rare combination but does not win the lottery for transitioning to the CZ state, the main display 8 may execute a fake continuous performance of the CZ state for a specified number of games (e.g., three games) to notify the player that they will not ultimately transition to the CZ state. In this case, the characters that appear in the continuous performance of the CZ state and the fake continuous performance may basically be set to be the same, but the final notification content may be made different, keeping the player's expectations high until the very end.

For example, as a continuous CZ state performance (or fake continuous performance), a performance image may be executed in which the character challenges a sports competition throughout each game. In this case, during the continuous performance (or fake continuous performance), sports competitions are continuously executed throughout the games in between, and if the CZ state is achieved, an image is executed in which the character ultimately succeeds in the competition (for example, succeeds in scoring a goal in soccer), and if the CZ state is not achieved, an image is executed in which the character fails the competition.

・Transition process from normal game state to AT state (arrow g1 in FIG. 3)
In the normal game state, the main control device 10 performs a lottery process for transitioning to the AT state based on the winning of a predetermined rare role. For example, when a strong cherry role is won, the transition process to the AT state is performed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1%). The condition for transitioning to the AT state is winning this transition lottery.
In addition, the transition to the AT state in the normal game state may be made on the condition that a specified rare role is won, or may be made with a specified probability (e.g., 1%) when a losing lottery result is derived in which no small role is won.

In this first embodiment, the transition to the AT state is mainly performed via a pseudo-bonus state in order to heighten the player's sense of anticipation, and therefore the probability of transitioning directly from the normal game state to the AT state is set to be extremely low.
In addition, the probability of transitioning directly from the normal gaming state to the AT state may be made changeable depending on the set probability in the probability setting device 14, or the lottery for transitioning directly from the normal gaming state to the AT state may be won only in the case of a relatively high set value (e.g., setting 4 to 6).
Furthermore, in the normal game state, if the player wins the lottery to transition to the AT state, a waiting period is inserted and a premonition effect is executed in the same manner as when the pseudo-bonus state described above occurs, and the AT state occurs after the premonition effect ends.

In addition, when the lottery for transitioning directly from the normal game state to the AT state is won, the selection control of premonition effects different from that when the pseudo bonus state occurs may be performed. For example, when transitioning directly to the AT state, the selection rate of premonition effects consisting of characters and backgrounds that have a low appearance rate (or do not appear) in fake premonition effects may be made higher than when the pseudo bonus state occurs. Also, premonition effects that are not executed when the pseudo bonus state occurs may be executed only when transitioning directly to the AT state.

(CZ state)
In the CZ state, push order navigation is not performed when the push order bell role is won, but since the lottery process for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state is performed with a higher probability in each game than in the normal game state, it is a game state in which it is easier to transition to the pseudo bonus state than when remaining in the normal game state.
Although push order navigation is not performed when the push order bell role is won, push order navigation may be executed when the push order bell role is won, or push order navigation may be executed a portion of the time when the push order bell role is won, i.e., with a predetermined probability (for example, 40%) when the push order bell role is won.

Since it is easier to transition to a pseudo-bonus state while in the CZ state than while in the normal game state, the CZ state is positioned as a chance zone in the flow of the game.
The number of times that the CZ state can be played is the minimum number of games, 10 games, and after the 10th game, a lottery to end the CZ state is held by the main control device 10, and if the lottery to end the CZ state is won, the CZ state will end with that game.
During the CZ state, control information regarding the CZ state is transmitted from the main control unit 10 to the sub-control unit 20, and under the control of the main control unit 10 and the sub-control unit 20, various effects and the number of remaining games during the CZ state are displayed on the main display 8.

・Transition process from CZ state to pseudo bonus state (arrow e1 in FIG. 3)
In the CZ state, a lottery process for transitioning to a pseudo bonus state is performed in each game.
The winning probability of the pseudo bonus state transition lottery process is set according to the winning role of each game. The winning probability of the pseudo bonus state transition lottery process is, for example, 50% when a rare role is won, 10% when a bell role or a replay role is won, and 5% when a miss occurs. The pseudo bonus state transition lottery is performed for each game in the CZ state, but whether or not there is a transition to the pseudo bonus state is determined in the final game of the CZ state, and when the transition to the pseudo bonus state is announced in the final game, the game state will transition to the pseudo bonus state in the same way as in the normal game state.

In other words, the CZ state is similar to the high probability state described above in that the probability of transitioning to the pseudo bonus state is higher than in the normal game state; however, in the CZ state, even roles that do not trigger the transition to the pseudo bonus state in the normal game state (such as bell roles and replay roles) can potentially transition to the pseudo bonus state, making the CZ state more advantageous to the player than the high probability state.
In addition, since the lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus state is executed when each role is internally won, the lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus state is executed even if the symbol corresponding to the winning role does not stop on reel 4 (when a miss occurs).
Also, when the CZ state ends and the game transitions to a pseudo bonus state, the game zone continues as an advantageous zone.

In addition, the winning probability of the pseudo bonus state for some or all of the winning roles may be other than those described above. In addition, the transition lottery trigger role for the pseudo bonus state during the CZ state may be other than those described above.
In addition, the pseudo bonus state transition lottery process is performed when the bell role is won, but the pseudo bonus state transition lottery process may be performed based on the winning of a symbol corresponding to the bell role.

In addition, during the CZ state, a CZ state image is displayed on the main display 8, allowing the player to recognize that he or she is in the CZ state throughout the game during that CZ state.
In addition, when a game that wins the lottery for transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state is played, a predetermined preparatory performance image (video) is displayed during the game, and after the game ends, a notification image is displayed to notify the player that the game has transitioned to the pseudo-bonus state.
For example, during the CZ state, an image of the main character sleeping is displayed as the CZ state image, and during a game in which the player wins the lottery to transition to the pseudo bonus state, a preparatory performance video is displayed in which the main character is shown in close-up to show whether or not he or she will wake up, and after the game ends, a notification image of the main character waking up is displayed, thereby executing a performance to notify the player that the pseudo bonus state has been won.

The above preparation effect image is also displayed if there is a certain probability (e.g., 10%) that a game will be played during the CZ state in which the player will not win the pseudo bonus state. In this case, after the game ends, a notification image in which the main character does not wake up is displayed, thereby executing an effect to notify the player that the player will not win the pseudo bonus state.

In addition, when the game is executed after the 10th game in the CZ state, a lottery is held to end the CZ state, and if this lottery is won, an effect is executed in which the screen gradually becomes darker during game execution, and after the game ends, an effect is executed in which the entire screen becomes dark to notify that the CZ state has ended.
In addition, when playing the game after the 10th game during the CZ state, even if the ending lottery is not won (continues), a similar effect of gradually darkening the screen as described above will be executed with a predetermined probability. In this case, the screen will brighten again after the game ends, informing players that the CZ state will continue.

The presentation for notifying the player of whether or not the pseudo bonus state has been entered during the CZ state may be other than the above. For example, a presentation in which an ally character and an enemy character battle each other over a specified period of games may be executed, and the player may be notified of whether or not the pseudo bonus state has been entered based on the results of the battle presentation.

・Transition process from CZ state to normal gaming state (arrow d1 in FIG. 3)
In the CZ state, if the player does not win the lottery to transition to the pseudo bonus state but wins the lottery to end the CZ state, the player will transition to the normal game state after the game ends.
At this time, after the game ends, the screen of the main display 8 goes dark and the end of the CZ state is announced without transitioning to the pseudo bonus state.
Also, when the CZ state ends and the game state transitions to the normal game state, the game area continues as the advantageous area, but the game area may transition from the advantageous area to the normal area.

When transitioning from the CZ state to the normal game state, setting-related information (setting suggestion information) that can suggest the setting value set by the probability setting device 14 may be notified by the notification means (main display 8, speaker 9) under the control of the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20. For example, a predetermined character from among multiple characters may be displayed on the main display device 8 or the sub-display device 17. The character to be displayed is selected according to a selection probability that is preset in accordance with each setting value of the probability setting device 14, so that it is possible to predict the setting value to some extent from the displayed character.

(pseudo bonus state)
The pseudo-bonus state as a special gaming state is a gaming state in which it is extremely easy to win medals, as push order navigation for the push order bell role is executed as a notification of an operation mode that is advantageous to the player during the game in the pseudo-bonus state.

In addition, the pseudo bonus state continues for a predetermined period of time, and a lottery for transition to the AT state is held in a predetermined game executed during that period.
In the first embodiment, the pseudo bonus state is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 20 games).

During the pseudo bonus state, push order navigation is executed, and the probability of winning the push order bell role is set so that medals increase if the player plays the game by following the push order navigation. Therefore, if the player wins the lottery to transition to the AT state during the pseudo bonus state, in which a large number of medals can be won, the AT state will occur after the pseudo bonus state ends, and the player will be able to win a certain number of medals while playing the game to trigger the next pseudo bonus state, creating a synergistically advantageous state for the player.

Furthermore, in the first game after transition to the pseudo bonus state, the period from the operation of the start lever 3 to the operation of the stop button 5 becoming effective is extended by the control of the main control device 10, and during this period, a pseudo game (announcement pseudo game) is executed in which a so-called reel presentation is performed in which the reel 4 is rotated forward, a special pattern combination is temporarily stopped on the reel 4, and then the reel 4 is rotated forward again, and it is announced that the pseudo bonus state has occurred.
In addition, rather than executing a pseudo-game notification in the first game after the transition to the pseudo-bonus state and temporarily stopping the special symbol combination (such as "7-7-7"), the pseudo-bonus state can be started in the next game in which a predetermined role (for example, a replay role) is won, and when the predetermined role is won, the stopping of reel 4 can be controlled so that the special symbol combination stops when reel 4 is stopped in a predetermined push order (for example, "5c→5b→5a"), and when the predetermined role is won, the predetermined push order can be announced, making it possible to form the special symbol combination one game before the pseudo-bonus state begins.

The period during which the pseudo-game notification is performed is set to, for example, 15 seconds, and during this period, operation of the stop button 5 is invalid, so that the game cannot proceed even if the reels 4 are in motion.
Then, when the notification pseudo game ends, the special symbol combination (such as "7, 7, 7") stops (automatically stops), so that the pseudo bonus state is a state in which navigation is executed in the same way as the AT state in terms of game content, but from the appearance it appears as if a so-called bonus state (real bonus state) has occurred, which is differentiated from the AT state.

Furthermore, when the notification pseudo game ends, the reel 4 automatically starts rotating in the forward direction, and the operation of the stop button 5 becomes effective, starting the main game. From this point on, the stop operation of the first game that has transitioned to the pseudo bonus state becomes possible in the same way as in a normal game.
During the reel presentation, the sub-controller 20 controls the main display 8 to display an image corresponding to the reel presentation, which notifies the player of the occurrence of a pseudo bonus state.

・Transition process from pseudo bonus state to AT state (arrow f1 in FIG. 3)
In the pseudo bonus state, a lottery process for transition to the AT state is performed based on the execution of each game during the pseudo bonus state.
In this first embodiment, a lottery process for transition to the AT state is executed for each game during the pseudo bonus state to determine whether or not to transition to the AT state.
Then, if the result of the AT state transition lottery process is that a transition condition to the AT state is met as a result of the establishment of a special condition, the game state will transition to the AT state after the pseudo bonus state ends.
In addition, when the pseudo bonus state ends and the game transitions to the AT state, the game zone continues as the advantageous zone.

In this first embodiment, the AT state transition lottery process may be any process that transitions to the AT state during part of the pseudo bonus state. The AT state transition lottery may be performed with a fixed probability for each game, or when a rare role is won, the AT state transition lottery may be performed with a higher probability than when a non-rare role is won.

In addition, the lottery process for transition to the AT state may be performed throughout the entire pseudo-bonus state, or a period of a predetermined number of games (e.g., three games) may be set at the end of the pseudo-bonus state for performing the lottery process for transition to the AT state, and a lottery may be held during this period to determine whether or not to transition to the AT state.
In addition to the AT state transition lottery process in the game during the pseudo bonus state, an AT state transition lottery process may be performed at the time of transition (start) of the pseudo bonus state.

In addition, during the pseudo bonus state, in response to the execution of the game, a predetermined presentation is executed on the main display 8 under the control of the sub-controller 20, which acts as a presentation control means, based on the reception of control information from the main control unit 10.

For example, when a rare role is won in a game during the pseudo bonus state, a presentation is executed to notify the player that the rare role has been won.
In addition, during a predetermined period of games (e.g., three games) at the end of the pseudo bonus state, a continuous presentation (battle presentation) is executed according to the result of the lottery for transition to the AT state, and if the lottery result is for a transition to the AT state, a presentation result in which the ally character ultimately wins is derived, and if the lottery result is not for a transition to the AT state, a presentation result in which the ally character ultimately loses is derived, and the result of the lottery for transition to the AT state is announced as the result of the continuous presentation.

In addition, the presentation mode during the continuous performance is determined in advance based on the result of the AT state transition lottery, and if the lottery result is to transition to the AT state, a presentation mode in which the ally character has the advantage is determined, and if the lottery result is not to transition to the AT state, a presentation mode in which the ally character has the disadvantage is determined. However, since the AT state transition lottery process is also performed in the game while the above continuous performance is being executed, the final result of the continuous performance is determined taking into account the AT state transition lottery process during the continuous performance.
In addition, if a transition to the AT state is determined as a result of the AT state transition lottery process during the pseudo bonus state, a presentation may be executed to notify the player that the transition to the AT state has been confirmed from that point on.

In addition, during other pseudo bonus states, in order to increase the interest of the game, a pseudo bonus state effect (pseudo bonus effect) in which a specific character appears is displayed on the main display 8 or the sub-display 17. In the pseudo bonus effect, for example, an introductory image of each character that appears is displayed, and a specific piece of music is output from the speaker 9.

In addition, the lottery for transition to the AT state during the pseudo bonus state may be executed in a manner other than that described above. For example, when reel 4 is stopped in a normal operation manner (e.g., an operation manner in which the left reel 4a is stopped first), a symbol combination corresponding to a replay role stops, but when reel 4 is stopped in an irregular operation manner different from the normal operation manner (e.g., an operation manner in which the right reel 4c is stopped first), a specific replay role in which a special symbol combination (e.g., "BAR, BAR, BAR") stops can be selected, and when a specific replay role is won during a period other than the lottery game period during the pseudo bonus state, a transition to the AT state may be made unconditionally (with a 100% probability).
In this case, when a specific replay combination is won, it is preferable to display on the main display 8 an image encouraging the player to aim for an irregular operation mode and a special symbol combination.

In addition, a button effect may be executed during a continuous effect (battle effect) in the pseudo bonus state.
The button presentation as an operation presentation is a series of presentations in which first, on the main display 8 (or sub-display 17), an operation image consisting of an image imitating an operation button that prompts the operation of the presentation button 2d, or text information instructing an operation (e.g., "PUSH"), etc. is displayed, and then, when the indicated presentation button 2d (or upper presentation button 2f) is operated, a predetermined image is displayed on the main display 8 (or sub-display 17).For example, at the end of a game in which the final game of the match presentation is executed, an image imitating an operation button or an operation image is displayed, and then, when the indicated presentation button 2d is operated, an image notifying the result of the predetermined match-up lottery is displayed on the main display 8.
In this case, it is preferable that if the result of the match lottery is a win, the probability of the button effect being executed is higher than if the result is a non-win.

-Transition process from pseudo bonus state to normal game state (arrow b1 in FIG. 3)
In the pseudo bonus state, if the special condition is not met and the right to transition to the AT state is not granted, that is, if the result of the lottery process for transition to the AT state in the pseudo bonus state is not a winning result, the game transitions to the normal game state after the pseudo bonus state ends.
In addition, in some cases where the pseudo-bonus state ends and the game state transitions to the normal game state, the game zone may not transition from the advantageous zone to the normal zone.

When transitioning from the pseudo bonus state to the normal game state, setting-related information (setting suggestion information) that can suggest the setting value set by the probability setting device 14 may be notified by the notification means (main display 8, sub-display 17, speaker 9) under the control of the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20. For example, a predetermined character from among multiple characters may be displayed on the main display device 8 or the sub-display device 17, and the displayed character may be selected according to a selection probability that is preset in accordance with each setting value of the probability setting device 14, making it possible to predict the setting value to some extent from the displayed character.

(AT state)
The AT state in this first embodiment is a game state in which it is easy to win medals, as push order navigation for the push order bell role is performed to notify the player of an operation mode that is advantageous to the player during the game in the AT state.

In this first embodiment, details will be described later, but two types of AT states are set: a first AT state and a second AT state, each of which has different termination conditions, and the main control unit 10 determines the type of AT state to be generated and switches the type of AT state, etc.
Therefore, the end condition of the AT state differs depending on the type of the AT state at that time, and various aspects of the AT state, such as the duration, can be changed.

When the game transitions to the AT state, a pseudo-game notification may be executed in the first game, as in the case of a transition to the pseudo-bonus state, and a reel effect may be executed to notify the player of the transition to the AT state by pseudo-stopping a specified symbol combination on a specified line in the display window 6.

In addition, during the AT state, if a specified rare role is won, an additional lottery is held to award a specified bonus (remaining difference in number of coins, remaining number of games), and if the additional lottery is won, the duration of the AT state will be extended according to the bonus awarded.
In addition, the trigger role for the additional lottery may be any role, or one of a plurality of bonuses with different sizes of bonuses to be awarded may be selected. Also, the size of the bonus to be awarded may be changed according to the winning role.

Furthermore, in this first embodiment, when a predetermined condition is met in a game during the AT state, an add-on specialization zone occurs for a predetermined period of time, and during this specialization zone, the lottery for adding on the number of games is executed at a higher rate than outside the add-on specialization zone.
Furthermore, since the specialized zone is a state that is extremely advantageous to the player, it is preferable that the above-mentioned specified condition be met with a specified probability when a rare role with a low winning probability is won.

・Transition process from AT state to pseudo bonus state (arrow i1 in FIG. 3)
During the AT state, as during the normal game state, the main control unit 10 performs a lottery process for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state based on the winning of a specified rare role as a specific lottery result, and the transition process to the pseudo bonus state is performed with a specified probability (e.g., 20%) when a chance role or a strong cherry role is won.
In addition, if the AT state transitions to a pseudo bonus state, the game zone will continue as an advantageous zone.

If the lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus state during the AT state is won, the AT state being executed is temporarily interrupted and the game state transitions to the pseudo bonus state.
Therefore, the number of remaining games in the AT state is reserved when transitioning to the pseudo bonus state, and when returning to the AT state, the AT state is resumed based on the reserved number of remaining games.
Also, if a transition occurs to the pseudo bonus state during the AT state, the pseudo bonus state will be executed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 20 games) as described above.

However, if the pseudo bonus state is entered during an AT state, unlike when the pseudo bonus state is entered during normal play, the lottery process for entering the AT state is not performed, and the pseudo bonus state ends when a predetermined number of games have been played, and the state returns to the AT state.

In addition, when a transition to a pseudo bonus state occurs during the AT state, an additional lottery may be held when a predetermined role is won during the pseudo bonus state.
In addition, if the player wins the lottery to transition to the pseudo-bonus state during the AT state, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state may not occur immediately, but rather a battle presentation (a battle presentation in which an ally character wins) may be executed as described above for a predetermined period of time (e.g., three games) before transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state.
In addition, even if a specified rare role is won during the AT state but the transition lottery to the pseudo bonus state is not won, a battle effect (a battle effect in which an ally character is defeated) may be executed.

・Transition process from AT state to normal gaming state (arrow h1 in FIG. 3)
In the AT state, if the termination condition is met, the game transitions to the normal game state after the AT state ends.
In addition, when the AT state ends and the game state transitions to the normal game state, the game zone transitions from the advantageous zone to the normal zone.
In addition, in some cases where the AT state ends and the game transitions to the normal game state, the advantageous zone may be continued.

In addition, at the end of the AT state, an AT end state is set for a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds), during which game progress is temporarily disabled, and after the AT end state ends, the game transitions to the normal game state.
During the AT end state, setting-related information that can suggest the setting value set by the probability setting device 14 is notified by the notification means under the control of the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20. For example, a predetermined image is displayed on the main display device 8 and the sub-display device 17, and a predetermined sound is output by the speaker 9.
As described above, the gaming state is transitioned in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment.

[Lottery table used to determine the ceiling number of games on the main control device]
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, a description will be given of the lottery for determining the ceiling game number during execution of a game in the normal gaming state in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment.
When the conditions for transition to the advantageous zone are met (e.g., winning the bell role) during the normal zone in the normal gaming state, the main control device 10 selects the ceiling number of games to be played in the subsequent normal gaming state.

When the number of games in the normal game state reaches the ceiling number of games selected, a pseudo bonus state is generated as a bonus.
In this first embodiment, the pseudo-bonus state can also occur when a transition lottery is won when a specified role (e.g., a rare role) is won during the normal game state, but the pseudo-bonus state is mainly generated when the number of games played reaches the ceiling game number.

In addition, when determining the ceiling number of games, the main control unit 10 first determines a zone in which a predetermined range of game numbers is specified for roughly determining the ceiling number of games, and then determines the ceiling number of games by selecting one game number from within the game number range in the determined zone.
The above-mentioned zones are preset into four types, zones 1 to 4, and each zone is set at a predetermined interval. Therefore, when the actual number of games reaches one of these four zones, the possibility of a pseudo bonus state occurring increases, and the player's sense of expectation increases at each predetermined timing.

The range of ceiling game numbers for each zone is 50 to 100 games in Zone 1, 250 to 299 games in Zone 2, 450 to 499 games in Zone 3, and 750 to 800 games in Zone 4.

Therefore, for example, if zone 1 is selected, a relatively small ceiling game number will be determined, and the game will proceed in a manner that is advantageous to the player, but on the other hand, if zone 4 is selected, a relatively large ceiling game number will be determined, and the game will proceed in a manner that is disadvantageous to the player. However, even if zone 4 is selected, since the maximum value is set to 800 games, the pseudo bonus state will always occur before the maximum number of games is played.

In addition, the main control device 10 is configured to perform processing to determine the game mode when transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone.
The game modes are set to a normal mode in which any of the above-mentioned zones 1 to 4 can be selected, and a heaven mode in which only zone 1 can be selected, and when transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, one of the game modes is selected based on the setting value in the probability setting device 14.
Therefore, when the heaven mode is selected, the pseudo bonus state will always occur within 100 games.
The probability of selecting the heaven mode is set to be higher as the set value in the probability setting device 14 is higher.

FIG. 4 shows an internal lottery table used to draw the ceiling game number when transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone when the normal mode is selected.
When normal mode is selected, the ceiling number of games is determined by first determining a zone for determining the ceiling number of games using the internal lottery table shown in Figure 4, and then determining the ceiling number of games from within the determined zone.When determining the zone, the main control unit 10 determines random numbers for the zone lottery, and in Figure 4, the range (number) of random numbers to be obtained is 256, and the number of random numbers for winning each zone is shown.

As shown in FIG. 4, for example, when the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 1, zone 1 is selected with a probability of 48/256, zone 2 is selected with a probability of 16/256, zone 3 is selected with a probability of 64/256, and zone 4 is selected with a probability of 128/256.

Although a detailed explanation is omitted, even if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 2 to 6, one of the zones will be selected with each probability shown in Figure 4.

Then, although not shown in the illustration, after each zone is determined, a lottery is held to determine the ceiling number of games set within the zone, and finally the ceiling number of games after the transition to the current advantageous zone is determined.
For example, when zone 1 is determined, any number of games between 50 and 100 games is determined as the ceiling number of games.

When the heaven mode is selected, a ceiling game number will be determined within the range of zone 1.
The determination of the ceiling number of games within each zone is carried out based on a random number for determining the ceiling number of games, which is extracted when the conditions for transition to the favorable zone are met, in the same manner as extracting the random numbers for the zone lottery, and the ceiling number of games within each zone is drawn evenly, but the lottery processing may also be performed so as to increase the selection rate of a specified ceiling number of games within each zone.

Since the ceiling game number is determined as described above, when the heaven mode is selected, the ceiling game number within 100 games will always be selected.
Furthermore, when the normal mode is selected, the higher the set value in the probability setting device 14, the higher the probability that a smaller ceiling game number will be selected.

In addition, when the set value is an even number, the probability that zone 1 will be selected is relatively lower than when the set value is an odd number, but the probability that zones 2 and 3 will be selected is higher. Therefore, when the set value is an even number, a lower ceiling game number is less likely to be selected than an odd number, but a higher ceiling game number also tends to be less likely to be selected.
On the other hand, when the set value is an odd number, the probability that zone 1 will be selected is relatively higher than when the set value is an even number, but the probability that zone 4 will be selected is also higher, and when the set value is an odd number, a lower ceiling game number is more likely to be selected than when the set value is an even number, but a higher ceiling game number also tends to be selected.

In addition, in the normal zone, the conditions for transition to the advantageous zone may be established when a rare role is won. In this case, the probability of a zone with a smaller ceiling number of games being selected may be increased compared to when a role other than a rare role is won, and further, the probability of zone 3 or zone 4 with a relatively large number of games being selected may be decreased.
In addition, in this first embodiment, a transition to the normal zone is made at the end of a pseudo-bonus state that does not involve a transition to an AT state, but it is also possible to allow the advantageous zone to continue for a part of the time at the end of a pseudo-bonus state that does not involve a transition to an AT state, and in this case, it is preferable to reset the ceiling game number at the end of the pseudo-bonus state.
The lottery for the ceiling number of games is carried out as described above.

[Transition of game state during AT state]
Next, referring to FIG. 5, the transition of the game state during the AT state will be described.
As described above, in the first embodiment, two types of AT states, the first AT state and the second AT state, are set.

The first AT state as the first special game state is a so-called difference-number-managed AT state, and its duration is managed so that the first termination condition is met when the net increase in the number of medals acquired by the player during the AT state exceeds a preset upper limit value.
On the other hand, the second AT state as the second special game state is a so-called game number-managed AT state, and the duration is managed so that the second termination condition is met when the number of games executed during the AT state exceeds a preset upper limit value.

In the main control device 10, during the AT state, the duration of the AT state is managed by controlling the state to be either the first AT state or the second AT state.
In other words, the main control unit 10 is equipped with a special game state control means that can control the special game state to either a first special game state (first AT state) in which the special game state ends upon the satisfaction of a predetermined first termination condition, or a second special game state (second AT state) in which the special game state ends upon the satisfaction of a second termination condition different from the first termination condition.

FIG. 5 shows the transition of the game state during the AT state, which is realized by the control of the main control device 10.
As shown in FIG. 5, in the main control device 10, when the transition condition (start condition) of the AT state is satisfied, the state is first transitioned to the first AT state.
Therefore, at the start of the AT state, a transition is made to a first AT state of difference number management type, an initial remaining difference number (e.g., 100 sheets) is set, and the first AT state of this remaining difference number is generated.

Then, when the game is executed during the first AT state, the remaining difference in number of coins becomes 0 or less, that is, when the difference in number of coins during the first AT state exceeds the upper limit number (+100 coins), the first termination condition is met, and the AT state ends together with the end of the first AT state.
In other words, the main control device 10, as a special game state control means, enables the first termination condition to be established based on the number of game media acquired by the player during the first special game state (first AT state).

On the other hand, if the AT state switching condition is satisfied in the first AT state before the first termination condition is satisfied, the first AT state is switched to the second AT state (arrow a2 in FIG. 5).
In other words, the main control device 10, which serves as a special game state control means, is equipped with a special game state switching control means capable of executing switching control from the first AT state to the second AT state based on the establishment of predetermined conditions during the first AT state.
Therefore, in the middle of the AT state, the AT state is switched from a difference number management type AT state to a game number management type AT state, and the management of the duration is changed.

In this first embodiment, the switching condition for switching to the second AT state is met with a predetermined probability (e.g., 30%) when a predetermined rare role (e.g., a strong cherry role) is won in a game during the first AT state.
Therefore, when the specified rare role is won, the main control unit 10 executes a switching lottery to determine whether or not to switch to the second AT state, and when the switching lottery is won, the switching condition is met and a switch to the second AT state is decided, resulting in the first AT state ending (ending midway) in that game and transitioning to the second AT state from the next game.

In addition, when a specified rare role (e.g., a strong cherry role) is won in a game during the first AT state, a switching effect is executed by, for example, displaying on the main display 8 an image notifying the player that the specified rare role has been won, along with a performance image notifying the player of whether or not to switch to the second AT state.
For example, at the start of a game in which a specified rare role is won during the first AT state, a treasure chest image resembling a treasure chest is displayed on the main display 8, thereby starting the switching effect, and while the game is being played, a video of a specified character opening the treasure chest image is displayed, and after the game ends, the switching effect ends when an image is displayed of the treasure chest image being opened to reveal its contents.

If the contents of the treasure chest image disclosed at the end of the switching performance are empty, it is announced that the switching lottery was not a winner, i.e., a switch to the second AT state will not occur, and the first AT state will continue as is. Conversely, if treasure is found from the contents of the treasure chest image disclosed at the end of the switching performance, it is announced that the switching lottery was a winner, i.e., a switch to the second AT state will occur, and a switch to the second AT state will occur.
In addition, the switching effect may be executed as a continuous effect (such as a match effect) that spans multiple games.

After switching to the second AT state, the game transitions to a game number-managed second AT state, and the initial number of remaining games is set when the switch is decided, and the second AT state is generated for this number of remaining games.
Then, when the number of remaining games becomes 0 or less as a result of the execution of a game during the second AT state, i.e., when the number of games executed during the second AT state exceeds the upper limit number and the second termination condition is met, the AT state ends together with the end of the second AT state.
In other words, the main control device 10, which serves as a special game state control means, enables the second termination condition to be established based on the number of games executed during the second special game state (second AT state).
After switching to the second AT state, the state is not switched back to the first AT state.

In addition, the initial number of remaining games set when switching to the second AT state is set by referring to the remaining difference in the number of remaining coins in the first AT state at that time, and dividing this remaining difference in the number of remaining coins by the expected value of the net increase in the number of medals per game, which is preset in the slot machine 1, to set the initial number of remaining games.
In this first embodiment, the expected value of the net increase in the number of medals per game (the actual number of medals increased) is set based on the probability of winning the push order bell role, etc., and is approximately 3 medals per game.

Therefore, for example, if the second AT state is switched to when the remaining difference in number of coins is 60 coins, the initial number of remaining games in the second AT state will be 20 games.
As a result, when switching to the second AT state, the remaining number of games that will result in an expected value for the net increase in the number of medals equal to the remaining difference in the number of medals in the first AT state at that time will be awarded.

In this way, when switching to the second AT state, the initial number of remaining games in the second AT state is determined, and the termination condition of the second AT state (second termination condition) is determined by this initial number of remaining games in the second AT state, so that the termination condition of the second AT state is determined according to the remaining difference in number of coins that will be updated during the first AT state.
In other words, the main control unit 10, as a special game state switching control means, is capable of setting a second termination condition for the switched-to second special game state (second AT state) based on specified information (remaining difference in number of coins) that is updated during the first special game state (first AT state) and is related to the establishment of the first termination condition.

As described above, in this first embodiment, during the AT state, either the first AT state or the second AT state, which have different ending conditions, will occur, making it possible to play a highly interesting game in which the continuation mode of the AT state changes in various ways.
In other words, in a difference number management type AT state, the duration is managed according to the number of medals actually paid out, regardless of the payout of the number of games, resulting in an AT state that has the characteristic that it does not cause dissatisfaction to the player even when a game that does not result in the payout of medals is played.

On the other hand, in a game number managed AT state, even if a large amount of medals are paid out, the AT state will continue until the specified number of games have been played, resulting in an AT state characterized by the fact that the sense of expectation continues until the specified number of games have been played, even if a large amount of medals are paid out.
In other words, it is possible to provide game content that changes the player's sense of security and expectation depending on the type of AT state.

Furthermore, as described below, in this first embodiment, control is performed so that the second AT state is more advantageous to the player than the first AT state, so that while in the first AT state, the player will be interested in switching to the second AT state, and when switched to the second AT state, the player's anticipation of winning medals will increase.
In other words, by switching to the second AT state, it is possible to provide game content that enhances the interest of the game and the player's sense of anticipation.

Furthermore, a second termination condition for the switched-to second AT state can be set based on the remaining difference in number of coins related to the establishment of the first termination condition, which is information updated during the first AT state. Therefore, even when switching between the first AT state and the second AT state is performed, the first AT state and the second AT state can be associated with each other, making it possible to increase interest during the AT state.
In addition, since the duration of the second AT state is changed depending on the end time of the first AT state, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the end time of the first AT state. In addition, if the first AT state ends early, the duration of the second AT state is extended, which makes it possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation.

In addition, the first end condition can be established based on the number of game media acquired by the player during the first AT state, and the second end condition can be established based on the number of games played during the second AT state, so that the difference in gameplay between the first AT state and the second AT state can be made clear, and it is possible to increase the interest of playing during the AT state.

In the first embodiment, the predetermined condition (switching condition) for switching to the second AT state is that a predetermined rare role (e.g., a strong cherry role) is won in a game during the first AT state with a predetermined probability (e.g., 30%), but the predetermined condition may be other than the above, for example, when a predetermined role is won a predetermined number of times during the first AT state, or when the number of games played during the first AT state reaches a predetermined number.

In addition, the initial setting of the remaining number of games when switching to the second AT state may be other than as described above. For example, the remaining difference in number of coins in the first AT state may be set as the remaining number of games in the second AT state.
Also, a predetermined number of remaining games may be set at the initial stage regardless of the remaining number of difference in the first AT state. In this case, it is preferable to set the initial number of remaining games so that the expected value for the net increase in the number of medals is higher than the remaining number of difference in the first AT state.
Also, the number of remaining games in the second AT state may be determined by lottery based on the remaining number of difference in the first AT state. In this case, it is preferable to perform a lottery in which the number of remaining games increases as the remaining number of difference increases.
As described above, the transition of the game state during the AT state is performed.

[Additional lottery during AT state]
Next, referring to Figure 6, the additional lottery during the AT state will be explained.
As mentioned above, during the AT state, an additional lottery is held to award a bonus based on the results of the role selection, and if the additional lottery is won, the duration of the AT state will be extended according to the bonus awarded.

In this first embodiment, the AT states are a first AT state and a second AT state, which have different controls regarding their duration, so that when the additional lottery is won, the manner in which the bonus is awarded differs depending on the type of AT state.
In other words, in the main control unit 10, if the additional lottery is won in a game during the first AT state, a predetermined number of medals is added to the remaining difference in number as a bonus, and if the additional lottery is won in a game during the second AT state, a predetermined number of games is added to the remaining number of games as a bonus.

Therefore, if you win the additional lottery, in the first AT state, the remaining difference in number of coins will increase, and the duration will be extended accordingly, and in the second AT state, the remaining number of games will increase, and the duration will be extended accordingly.

FIG. 6 shows the probability of winning the additional lottery at the main control unit 10, that is, the probability of being awarded a bonus when the trigger role for the additional lottery is won during the AT state.
In the first embodiment, the trigger role for the additional lottery is set to a rare role, but it may be another role.

First, as shown in FIG. 6(a), in a game in the first AT state, when a weak rare role is won, there is a 50% probability that 0 coins will be added (topped up) to the remaining difference number, i.e., no topping up will be performed, there is a 30% probability that 10 coins will be added (topped up) to the remaining difference number, there is a 17% probability that 30 coins will be added (topped up) to the remaining difference number, and there is a 3% probability that 50 coins will be added (topped up) to the remaining difference number.

Similarly, in a game in the first AT state, if a strong rare role is won, there is a 0% probability that 0 coins will be added (topped up) to the remaining difference number, i.e., an add-on will always be added, there is a 60% probability that 10 coins will be added (topped up) to the remaining difference number, there is a 30% probability that 30 coins will be added (topped up) to the remaining difference number, and there is a 10% probability that 50 coins will be added (topped up) to the remaining difference number.

Next, as shown in FIG. 6(b), in a game in the second AT state, if a weak rare role is won, there is a 50% probability that 0 games will be added (topped up) to the number of remaining games, i.e., no topping up will be performed, there is a 30% probability that 10 games will be added (topped up) to the number of remaining games, there is a 17% probability that 20 games will be added (topped up) to the number of remaining games, and there is a 3% probability that 50 games will be added (topped up) to the number of remaining games.

Similarly, in a game in the second AT state, if a strong rare role is won, there is a 0% probability that 0 games will be added (added) to the number of remaining games, i.e., an addition will always be made, there is a 60% probability that 10 games will be added (added) to the number of remaining games, there is a 30% probability that 20 games will be added (added) to the number of remaining games, and there is a 10% probability that 50 games will be added (added) to the number of remaining games.

Because the above-described method of drawing the additional bonus is performed, there is a possibility that an additional bonus will be awarded if a rare role is won in both the first AT state and the second AT state, and the probability of winning the additional bonus bonus lottery and of being awarded a larger bonus is higher if a strong rare role is won than if a weak rare role is won.
Therefore, when a rare role is won, the player's sense of expectation can be increased, and when a strong rare role is won, the player's sense of expectation can be further increased.

Furthermore, even if the player wins the additional lottery with the same rare role and the same probability, the player will be given a more advantageous benefit in the second AT state than in the first AT state.
In other words, for example, when a strong rare role is won and there is a 30% probability of winning the additional lottery, if the first AT state is reached, 30 medals will be added, but if the second AT state is reached, 20 games worth of medals will be added, which can be expected to result in an increase of 60 medals.

Therefore, since the additional lottery is more favorable to the player in the second AT state, the second AT state becomes a special gaming state that is more favorable to the player than the first AT state, and during the AT state, the player hopes that the state will switch to the second AT state, and when the state switches to the second AT state, the player's sense of anticipation can be increased.

In addition, as long as the above-mentioned trend of the additional lotteries can be formed, the probability of winning each additional lottery and the amount of the benefit awarded may be other than those mentioned above.
In addition, when a strong rare role is won during the first AT state, a lottery for switching to the second AT state may also be held. In this case, both the switching lottery and the additional lottery may be held, or only the switching lottery may be executed as a priority, and an additional lottery may be held if the switching lottery is not won.
As described above, the additional lottery is conducted during the AT state.

[Modification 1 of the First Embodiment]
Next, a first modified example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.
In variant example 1 of this first embodiment, only the control related to the additional lottery in the game during the AT state differs from that of the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and everything else is the same as the slot machine 1 described above, so only the differences will be explained.

First, in the first modification of the first embodiment, the first AT state occurs at the initial stage of the AT state, as described above.
Then, in a game during the first AT state, if a trigger role (rare role) for an additional draw is won, an additional draw is held to determine whether or not a specified number of medals will be added to the remaining difference in number of medals, as described above, and if this additional draw is won, the remaining difference in number of medals will increase by the amount of the additional draw and the duration will be extended by that amount.

Furthermore, in a game during the first AT state, if a trigger role (rare role) for an additional draw is won, in addition to the additional draw related to the increase in the remaining difference number of coins described above, an additional draw related to the increase in the number of remaining games is also held at the same time.
This additional lottery for increasing the number of remaining games is an additional lottery for the number of remaining games in the second AT state to which it may be switched after that point, and if the additional lottery is won, the number of remaining games in the second AT state to which it may be switched later will increase.

In other words, in a game during the first AT state, if a trigger role (rare role) for an additional draw is won, in addition to the additional draw (hereinafter also referred to as the normal additional draw) related to the increase in the remaining difference in the number of coins for the first AT state that is occurring at that time, an additional draw (hereinafter also referred to as the preparatory additional draw) related to the increase in the remaining number of games for the second AT state that may occur later is also held at the same time.
Therefore, if the player wins the additional lottery (preparatory additional lottery) to increase the number of remaining games for the second AT state, the number of games will be added (added) in advance before the state has switched to the second AT state.
Then, when the state is subsequently switched to the second AT state, the number of games that has been determined in advance to be added will be added to the initial remaining games awarded when the state is switched to the second AT state.

Even if the above-mentioned preparatory additional lottery is won, there is a possibility that the second AT state will not be switched, in which case the benefit determined by winning the additional lottery will be invalidated.
However, if the preparatory addition lottery is won but the switch to the second AT state is not performed, a specified bonus image is displayed on the main display 8 based on the result of the invalid preparatory addition lottery, as will be described in detail later, to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied.

Figure 7 shows the winning probability for each additional lottery in the first AT state in the main control unit 10, i.e., the probability of being awarded a bonus when the trigger role for the additional lottery is won during the AT state.
In addition, the trigger role for each additional draw is set to a rare role, but other roles may also be used.

First, FIG. 7(a) shows the probability of winning for each winning role during an additional draw related to an increase in the remaining difference number of coins in a game in the first AT state, i.e., an additional draw related to the first AT state (normal additional draw) executed in the first AT state.

As shown in Figure 7 (a), in a game in the first AT state, when an additional lottery (normal additional lottery) is held when each rare role is won, the additional lottery is won with the same probability as the additional lottery during the first AT state in the first embodiment described above, and a predetermined number of medals is added (added).
In addition, the probability of winning the additional lottery (normal additional lottery) when each role is won, and the number of medals added at that time, are the same as described above (see Figure 6 (a)), so explanation will be omitted here.
If the normal add-on lottery is won, the corresponding number of medals is added to the remaining difference number, and the first AT state is extended by that amount.

Also, as shown in Figure 7 (b), when a rare role is won in a game in the first AT state, in addition to the normal add-on lottery, an add-on lottery (preparatory add-on lottery) for the second AT state to which the player may subsequently switch is also held at the same time, and the add-on is won with the same probability as described above, and a specified number of games is temporarily stored.
In addition, even after the preparatory addition lottery is won, the preparatory addition lottery continues to be executed, and if the preparatory addition lottery is won again, the corresponding number of games is added and stored to the number of games temporarily stored.

In addition, the probability of winning the additional lottery (preparatory additional lottery) when each role is won, and the number of games added at that time are the same as described above (see Figure 6 (b)), so explanation will be omitted here.
Then, when switching to the second AT state, as in the first embodiment described above, the initial number of remaining games will be awarded based on the remaining difference in the number of coins in the first AT state, but if the preparatory additional lottery has been won, the number of games temporarily stored above will be added to the initial number of remaining games when switching to the second AT state, and the second AT state will be extended by that amount.

In addition, since the regular add-on lottery and the preparation add-on lottery are held separately, for example, when you win a rare role once, you may win the regular add-on lottery and also win the preparation add-on lottery.

In this way, the number of remaining games in the second AT state changes depending on the preparation addition lottery, and therefore the second termination condition in the second AT state is changed depending on the preparation addition lottery.
Therefore, during the first AT state, a preparatory additional lottery is conducted in advance to change the second termination condition in the second AT state.

In other words, the main control unit 10, as a special game state switching control means, is equipped with a change lottery control means that can execute a lottery (preparatory additional lottery) that can change the second termination condition in the second special game state (second AT state) in advance during the first special game state (first AT state).
In addition, the main control device 10, as a change lottery control means, is capable of executing both a lottery that can change the first end condition in the first special game state (first AT state) and a lottery that can change the second end condition in the second special game state (second AT state) to which it can be switched, in a specified game during the first special game state (first AT state).

As described above, in variant 1 of the first embodiment, in addition to the normal add-on lottery, a preparatory add-on lottery is held in a game during the first AT state, so that when an add-on lottery trigger role is won, in addition to the add-on lottery related to the increase in the remaining difference in number of coins at that time, an add-on lottery related to the increase in the number of remaining games for the second AT state, which may be switched to later, is also held in advance.

Therefore, in a game during the first AT state, it is possible to increase the interest of the game, and it is also possible to increase the sense of anticipation for both the first AT state and the second AT state.
Furthermore, if the preparation addition lottery is won, it is possible to significantly increase the player's sense of anticipation even before the switch to the second AT state is made.
Furthermore, in a specified game during the first AT state, both a normal additional draw and a preparatory additional draw are executed, making it possible to greatly increase the player's expectations in that game.

In addition, the probability of winning the additional prize and the benefits awarded in the regular additional prize lottery and the preparatory additional prize lottery may be other than those described above.For example, all or part of the trigger role for the additional prize lottery may be different between the regular additional prize lottery and the preparatory additional prize lottery.
In addition, the number of games remaining at the beginning of the second AT state is added to the number of games remaining at the beginning of the second AT state by winning the preparatory addition lottery, but the number of games remaining at the beginning of the second AT state may be determined only by the preparatory addition lottery during the first AT state. Therefore, in this case, if the preparatory addition lottery is not won, the right to continue the second AT state will be lost, so the preparatory addition lottery also serves as a lottery to determine whether or not the switching condition to the second AT state is established.

In addition, even if the preparation add-on lottery is won, if the switch to the second AT state is not made, the granted benefit is invalidated. However, if the preparation add-on lottery is won but the switch to the second AT state is not made and the condition for terminating the first AT state is met, the first AT state may be extended according to the benefit granted by winning the preparation add-on lottery.

Next, referring to Figure 8, we will explain the presentation (top-up presentation) when the above-mentioned normal top-up lottery and preparatory top-up lottery are executed in variant example 1 of the first embodiment.
FIG. 8 shows a presentation image on the main display 8 when the above-mentioned normal add-on lottery and preparatory add-on lottery are executed.

The main control unit 10 is configured to execute a normal add-on lottery and a preparatory add-on lottery when a specified rare role is won in a game during the first AT state, and transmits control information related to the normal add-on lottery and the preparatory add-on lottery to the sub-control unit 20, and the sub-control unit 20 executes the add-on performance by displaying performance images related to the normal add-on lottery and the preparatory add-on lottery on the main display 8 based on the received control information.
In response to the execution of the added performance on the main display 8, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 9, and a predetermined decorative light is output from the lamp 11.

First, as shown in FIG. 8(a), during the first AT state, a first AT state image 24 is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8 to notify that the first AT state is being entered.
The first AT state image 24 can be any image that allows the player to recognize that he or she is in the first AT state and that enhances interest during the first AT state; for example, an introductory image (video) of a character that appears may be displayed.

In addition, a remaining difference number image 21a ("50" in FIG. 8(a)) is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen of the main display 8, indicating the remaining difference number at that time in the first AT state, and the remaining difference number image 21a is updated (subtracted) according to the increase in the net increase in the number of medals in the game during the first AT state.
In addition, an executed game count image 21b ("20G" in Figure 8(a)) is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the main display 8, indicating the number of games that have been executed at that time in the AT state (first AT state + second AT state), and the executed game count image 21b is updated (incremented) according to the execution of games in the AT state.

In addition, the first AT state image 24, the remaining difference number image 21a, and the number of games played image 21b on the main display 8 will continue to be displayed in subsequent games.
Furthermore, when the game is switched to the second AT state in a subsequent game, the first AT state image 24 is replaced with an image notifying the second AT state, and the remaining difference number image 21a is replaced with an image notifying the remaining number of games.

Next, FIG. 8(b) shows the image displayed on the main display 8 from the start of the game while the game is being played when a strong rare role (e.g., a strong watermelon role) is won during the first AT state.

In the first embodiment including this variant example 1, when a push order bell role is won in a game during the AT state, push order navigation images 22 (left push order navigation image 22a, center push order navigation image 22b, right push order navigation image 22c) in which numerical information informing the operation sequence (press order) of the stop buttons 5 is displayed within a circular frame will be displayed at the bottom of the screen of the main display 8, but when a rare role is won in the game, symbol information ("!") informing that a rare role has been won will be displayed within the frame of each push order navigation image 22 instead of numerical information, as shown in Figure 8 (b).
Then, based on the winning of a strong rare role, the main control unit 10 will conduct a regular additional lottery and a preparatory additional lottery.
In addition, the notification mode when a rare combination is won may be other than the above, and for example, a winning presentation involving the appearance of a specified character may be executed.

Next, Figure 8 (c) shows the presentation image on the main display 8 after the end of the game when a strong rare role (e.g., a strong watermelon role) is won during the first AT state, and in particular shows the presentation image when both the regular additional lottery and the preparation additional lottery are won.
As shown in Figure 8 (c), if the regular additional lottery is won, a first additional winning image 21c will be displayed at the bottom left of the screen of the main display 8 to inform the player that the regular additional lottery has been won and the number of medals that will be added (added).
FIG. 8(c) illustrates an example in which 10 medals are added to the remaining difference number, so an image of "+10 medals" is displayed as the first additional winning image 21c.

On the other hand, if the preparatory addition lottery is won, a second additional winning image 21d will be displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the main display 8 to inform the player that the preparatory addition lottery has been won and the number of games that will be added (added).
FIG. 8(c) illustrates an example in which 20 games are added to the remaining number of games, so an image of "+20G" is displayed as the second additional winning image 21d.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8(d), after a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the first added-on winning image 21c and the second added-on winning image 21d are displayed, the first added-on winning image 21c is erased and the remaining difference number image 21a for the number of medals won this time is updated (from "50 medals" to "60 medals"), thereby notifying the user that the duration of the first AT state has been extended.

Furthermore, after a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the first added-on winning image 21c and the second added-on winning image 21d are displayed, the second added-on winning image 21d will be erased, and a preparatory added-on game count image 21e will be displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the main display 8, notifying the total number of added-on games won during the first AT state as a result of the preparatory added-on lottery.

Note that Figure 8 (d) shows a case where the player has not yet won the preparatory add-on lottery and has won this preparatory add-on lottery, so the second preparatory add-on winning image 21d transitions directly to the preparatory add-on game count image 21e. However, if the player wins the preparatory add-on lottery again in a game after the player has already won the preparatory add-on lottery and the preparatory add-on game count image 21e is displayed, the number of added games at the time of the second win will be added and displayed to the preparatory add-on game count image 21e that is already displayed.

Furthermore, if the player immediately starts the next game after the end of a game, at that point the first additional winning image 21c and the second additional winning image 21d will be erased, and the remaining difference number of coins image 21a and the preparation additional game number image 21e will be updated (including appearing).
In addition, the timing for switching between the images related to the normal additional draw and the preparatory additional draw is not limited to the times mentioned above, but may be any time during the game in which a rare role is won or after the end of the game.

In addition, if the player does not win the regular add-on lottery or the preparatory add-on lottery, the first add-on winning image 21c or the second add-on winning image 21d may not be displayed, or an image informing the player that the player did not win the add-on lottery (such as "Too bad") may be displayed.

As described above, in variant 1 of the first embodiment, when a normal add-on lottery and a preparatory add-on lottery are performed in a game during the first AT state, an add-on performance related to the normal add-on lottery and the preparatory add-on lottery is performed on the main display 8.

Therefore, in a game during the first AT state, it is possible to further increase the interest of the game, and it is possible to clearly inform the player of the results of the regular add-on lottery and the preparatory add-on lottery, making it possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the results of each add-on lottery.

In addition, by displaying the preparatory additional game number image 21e, it is possible to increase the anticipation for switching to the second AT state, and the anticipation increases further each time the preparatory additional game number image 21e increases, so it is possible to efficiently increase the player's anticipation.
In addition, if a player wins the preparatory addition lottery multiple times, there is a possibility that the total number of added games may become unclear, but this situation can be prevented.

In addition, the add-on effects related to the normal add-on lottery and the preparatory add-on lottery are executed on the main display device 8, but they may also be executed on the sub-display device 17.
In addition, a button effect may be executed that involves operating the effect button 2d (or the upper effect button 2f) during the additional effect.

Next, referring to FIG. 9, we will explain the presentation in the first variant of the first embodiment in the case where, despite winning the preparatory additional lottery during the first AT state, switching to the second AT state is not performed and the first termination condition in the first AT state is met.

As mentioned above, in games during the first AT state, in addition to the normal add-on lottery, a preparatory add-on lottery is held, but the bonus (number of added games) awarded as a result of this preparatory add-on lottery is a bonus that only functions when the AT state switches to the second AT state. Therefore, even if the award of a bonus is decided as a result of the preparatory add-on lottery, if the first AT state ends without switching to the second AT state, the bonus that was scheduled to be awarded will be invalidated, which may cause dissatisfaction among players.

Therefore, in variant 1 of the first embodiment, if the granting of a bonus is determined as a result of the preparatory addition lottery, but switching to the second AT state is not performed thereafter, it is possible to provide the player with bonus information that is useful to the player as a relief measure.

Figure 9 shows the presentation images on the main display 8 during and after the final game when the first AT state ends without switching to the second AT state, even though the addition of the number of games has been determined as a result of the preparatory addition lottery.
First, Figure 9 (a) shows a presentation image on the main display 8 during the execution of the final game of the first AT state (after the medals have been paid out) in which the first termination condition is met.

As shown in FIG. 9(a), during the first AT state, similarly to the above, the main display 8 displays a first AT state image 24, a remaining difference number image 21a, and a number of games played image 21b.
Furthermore, when the final game of the first AT state is executed and a predetermined number of medals are paid out, resulting in the first ending condition being met, the remaining difference number image 21a is updated to show "0 medals."

Also, at this time, if the result of the preparatory addition lottery during the first AT state has determined that the number of games to be added to the second AT state will be added, a preparatory addition game number image 21e will be displayed, and for example, an image of "+30G" will be displayed as shown in the figure.

In this state, when the final game of the first AT state ends, that is, even though the addition of the number of games has been determined as a result of the preparatory addition lottery, the first AT state ends without switching to the second AT state, as shown in Figure 9 (b), the first AT state image 24 is erased and instead a setting suggestion image 23 is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8.
The setting suggestion image 23 is information displayed under the control of the sub-controller 20, and the sub-controller 20 displays the setting suggestion image 23 based on the setting value (setting stage) set by the probability setting device 14 as a setting means, based on control information from the main control unit 10.

In other words, the sub-control device 20 is capable of displaying multiple images as setting suggestion images 23, and selects and displays one of the images depending on the setting value in the probability setting device 14.
For example, the sub-control device 20 selects and displays five types of images, images A to E, each of which will display a different character, according to a selection probability that is preset in accordance with each setting value of the probability setting device 14. Image A has a selection rate of 1% when the setting value of the probability setting device 14 is the maximum value (setting 6), but has a selection rate of 80% when the setting value is the minimum value (setting 1). Image E has a selection rate of 30% when the setting value of the probability setting device 14 is the maximum value (setting 6), but has a selection rate of 10% when the setting value is the minimum value (setting 1). Each image is displayed with a different selection rate.

Therefore, each image is selected according to the setting value in the probability setting device 14, resulting in images that are more likely to be selected the higher the setting, and images that are more likely to be selected the lower the setting, and based on the selected image, the player can predict to some extent the setting value in the probability setting device 14.
Furthermore, as long as the player is able to predict the setting value in the probability setting device 14 to some extent, the selection control of the image in the setting suggestion image 23 may be other than that described above.
Also, an image that definitively notifies a predetermined setting value may be provided as an option.
In addition, after the final game in the first AT state ends, the game progress may be disabled for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds), thereby preventing a situation in which the next game is started without being able to check the setting suggestion image 23.

As described above, in variant example 1 of the first embodiment, if an addition of the number of games is determined as a result of a preparatory addition lottery during the first AT state, but the first AT state ends without switching to the second AT state, a setting suggestion image 23 is displayed on the main display 8, and bonus information is provided to the player.
In other words, the sub-controller 20 is equipped with a bonus granting means (sub-controller 20) that can grant a predetermined bonus (display a setting suggestion image 23 as bonus information) when the second ending condition is changed by the main controller 10 as a change lottery control means but switching to the second special game state (second AT state) is not performed.

Therefore, even if the addition of the number of games to the second AT state has been determined by a preparatory addition lottery, and the first AT state ends without switching to the second AT state, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction.
In addition, as a relief measure for the player, a setting suggestion image 23 is displayed, so that the player can obtain important information for selecting a gaming machine, thereby making it possible to further reduce the player's dissatisfaction.

When the preparatory addition lottery has determined that the number of games to be added to the second AT state will be added, the setting suggestion image 23 is displayed. However, when the number of games to be added is a predetermined number (e.g., 30 games) or more, the setting suggestion image 23 may be displayed, and when the number is less than the predetermined number (e.g., 30 games), the setting suggestion image 23 may not be displayed.

In addition, as a relief measure for the player, bonus information is provided, and if the addition of the number of games to the second AT state has been determined by a preparatory addition lottery, or if the number of games to be added is a predetermined number (e.g., 30 games) or more, the bonus may be granted by continuing the advantageous zone after the end of the AT state without transitioning the play zone to the normal zone.
As described above, the first modification of the first embodiment is realized.

[Modification 2 of the First Embodiment]
Next, a second modified example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In variant example 2 of the first embodiment, only the control relating to the execution of the push order navigation when the push order bell role is won differs from that of the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above. As everything else is the same as the slot machine 1 described above, only the differences will be explained.

As mentioned above, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the push order bell role is won during a game in the pseudo bonus state or AT state, the player is notified of the specific operation information (executing the push order navigation) to derive the specific result ("Bell Bell Bell") corresponding to the push order bell role that was won, that is, the push order navigation is executed, but in the variant 2 of the first embodiment, the execution control of the push order navigation during the AT state is different from that of the first embodiment described above.

Specifically, as described above, when the AT state is entered, the reel is controlled to be in either the first AT state or the second AT state, and the main control unit 10 changes the probability of executing the push order navigation when the push order bell role is won depending on the type of AT state.
In other words, it is possible for an AT state in which the probability of push order navigation being executed is relatively high, and an AT state in which the probability of push order navigation being executed is relatively low, and in an AT state in which the probability of push order navigation being executed is relatively low, even if the push order bell role is won, there is a relatively high possibility that a game in which push order navigation is not executed will be played, and therefore the player is more likely to not obtain medals.

FIG. 10 shows the probability of executing push order navigation (probability of notifying specific operation information) when the push order bell role is won for each type of AT state in the main control device 10.
As shown in Figure 10, when the push order bell role is won in the first AT state, the execution control of the push order navigation is performed so that there is a 40% probability that the push order navigation is not executed and a 60% probability that the push order navigation is executed.
On the other hand, when the push order bell role is won in the second AT state, the push order navigation is never not executed, and the execution control of the push order navigation is performed so that the push order navigation is executed with a 100% probability.

The main control unit 10 controls the execution of the push order navigation when the push order bell role is won with the above probability, and if it decides to execute the push order navigation, it transmits control information related to the push order navigation to the sub-control unit 20, which acts as an alarm control means. The sub-control unit 20 controls the main display 8, navigation lamp 12, and speaker 9 to execute various notifications corresponding to the push order navigation, such as displaying a push order navigation image on the main display 8.
Therefore, the probability that the push order navigation will be executed when the push order bell role is won is higher in the second AT state than in the first AT state, and the second AT state is a more advantageous AT state for the player than the first AT state.

As described above, in variant example 2 of the first embodiment, when the push order bell role is won, in the first AT state, push order navigation is executed with a predetermined probability (60%), whereas in the second AT state, push order navigation is executed with a higher probability (100%) than in the first AT state.
In other words, when a game capable of deriving a specific result ("Bell Bell Bell") is played, the sub-control device 20 as a notification control means can notify specific operation information (execute push order navigation) with a first probability (60%) during the first special game state (first AT state), and can notify specific operation information with a second probability (100%) higher than the first probability during the second special game state (second AT state).

Therefore, it becomes possible to generate a variety of AT states in which the manner in which the push order navigation is executed changes, thereby making it possible to increase the entertainment value of the game.
In addition, when the state is switched to the second AT state, the probability of executing the push order navigation when the push order bell role is won is higher than in the first AT state, so it is possible to further increase the player's sense of expectation when the state is switched to the second AT state.
Furthermore, in the first AT state, the player will play the game while anticipating a switch to the second AT state, which can further increase the player's motivation to play.

In addition, the probability of executing the push order navigation during each AT state may be other than those described above, so long as the probability of executing the push order navigation when the push order bell role is won is higher in the second AT state than in the first AT state.
In addition, two more types of second AT states may be provided, and the probability of executing the push order navigation during one second AT state may be set to 80%, and the other may be set to 100%.
In addition, when executing push order navigation, the sub-controller 20 executes push order navigation based on control information from the main controller 10, but the main controller 10 may also execute push order navigation by directly controlling the notification means, for example, the main controller 10 may execute push order navigation by directly controlling the navigation lamp 12.
As described above, the second modification of the first embodiment is realized.

[Modification 3 of the First Embodiment]
Next, a third modified example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In variant example 3 of the first embodiment, only the additional selection during the second AT state and the control related to the transition of the game state during the AT state differ from the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above. As everything else is similar to the slot machine 1 described above, only the differences will be explained.

First, we will explain the additional lottery during the second AT state in variant example 3 of this first embodiment.
In variant example 1 of the first embodiment described above, during the first AT state, in response to a rare winning combination, a normal additional lottery is executed to increase the remaining difference in the number of coins, and a preparatory additional lottery is executed to increase the remaining number of games. In variant example 3, a normal additional lottery and a preparatory additional lottery are also executed, as in variant example 1.

Furthermore, in variant example 3 of the first embodiment, even after switching to the second AT state, both the normal add-on lottery and the preparatory add-on lottery are executed in response to the winning of a rare role.
However, since this is an additional lottery held after switching to the second AT state, the additional lottery held regarding the increase in the number of remaining games is a normal additional lottery, and the additional lottery held regarding the increase in the remaining difference in number of coins is a preparation additional lottery.

Therefore, if the preparation addition lottery after switching to the second AT state is won, the number of medals will be added based on the duration of the first AT state, regardless of the duration of the second AT state at that time.
In addition, the winning probability of each additional lottery during the second AT state is controlled to be the winning probability shown in Figure 6 (b) in the normal additional lottery, and is controlled to be the winning probability shown in Figure 6 (a) in the preparatory additional lottery.

Then, when the second termination condition is met in the second AT state, if the preparatory addition lottery (the addition lottery related to the increase in the remaining difference number of medals) during the second AT state has been won, that is, if there is an added number of medals as a result of the preparatory addition lottery at the end of the second AT state, the switching condition for the first AT state will be met, as shown in Figure 11, and a switch to the first AT state will be made (arrow b2 in Figure 11).
The switched first AT state will continue to be managed with the added number of medals as the initial remaining difference number.

After the state is switched back to the first AT state, the control for switching to the second AT state is performed again in the same manner as described above. Therefore, during the AT state, it is possible to repeat the first AT state and the second AT state.
It should be noted that other transitions of the game state shown in FIG. 11 are similar to those in the first embodiment described above, and therefore will not be described here.

As described above, in the third modification of the first embodiment, after switching from the first AT state to the second AT state, switching back to the first AT state is performed again.
In other words, the main control device 10, as a special game state switching control means, is capable of executing switching control to the first special game state again after switching from the first special game state (first AT state) to the second special game state (second AT state).

Therefore, the game mode during the AT state can be further diversified, and the entertainment value of the game can be further increased.
Furthermore, since the re-switching to the first AT state occurs upon the end of the second AT state, it is possible to once again increase the motivation of a player who has become discouraged by the end of the second AT state.
Furthermore, the repeated control of the first AT state and the second AT state will continue as long as additional bonuses are being added, making it possible to greatly increase the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, when switching back to the first AT state, the number of medals added in the preparatory addition lottery may be added to the initial remaining difference in number of medals (e.g., 50 medals) that has been set in advance.
As described above, the third modification of the first embodiment is realized.

[Fourth Modification of the First Embodiment]
Next, a fourth modified example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In variant example 4 of the first embodiment, only the control up to the time when the first AT state is switched to the second AT state during the AT state differs from that of the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and the rest is the same as that of the slot machine 1 described above, so only the differences will be explained.

In the first embodiment described above, when a game is in the first AT state, control is performed to switch to the second AT state with a predetermined probability (e.g., 30%) when a predetermined rare role (e.g., a strong cherry role) is won, but in this modification 4, the state does not switch directly from the first AT state to the second AT state, but transitions to the second AT state via the ATCZ state.

FIG. 12 shows a transition mode of the game state realized by the control of the main control device 10 in the fourth modified example of the first embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 12, in variant example 4 of the first embodiment, in a game during the first AT state, when a specified rare role (e.g., a strong cherry role) is hit, the game state is transitioned to the ATCZ state with a specified probability (e.g., 40%) (arrow a3 in FIG. 12).
The ATCZ state is a so-called chance zone in which switching to the second AT state is executed with a high probability for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 games), and in the games during this period, a lottery for switching to the second AT state is held with a high probability.

For example, if a weak rare role is won, there is an 80% probability of switching to the second AT state, if a strong rare role is won, there is a 100% probability of switching to the second AT state, and further, if a bell role or a replay role is won, there is a 10% probability of switching to the second AT state.
Therefore, instead of switching directly from the first AT state to the second AT state, the game state is first transitioned to one in which switching to the second AT state is highly likely.

Then, in a game during the ATCZ state, if the specified period ends without winning the lottery to switch to the second AT state, the game state is transitioned to the first AT state (arrow b3 in Figure 12), but if the lottery to switch to the second AT state is won during that period, the game state is transitioned to the second AT state from the next game (arrow c3 in Figure 12).
It should be noted that other transitions of the game state shown in FIG. 11 are similar to those in the first embodiment described above, and therefore will not be described here.

In addition, during the ATCZ state, the AT state will continue to be managed by subtracting the remaining difference in number of coins. Therefore, even if the game state is in the ATCZ state, the AT state will continue to be managed as in the immediately preceding first AT state, and the management will be continued even if the game state transitions back to the first AT state.

In addition, during the ATCZ state, various effects such as effects to notify the player of the game state and effects according to the results of the bonus lottery are executed under the control of the sub-controller 20, in the same manner as the CZ state during the normal game state described above. For example, effects to notify the player that a switching lottery has been held and effects to notify the player of the result of the switching lottery are executed.

As described above, in variant example 4 of the first embodiment, when a specified rare role is won in a game during the first AT state, a transition to the ATCZ state is made, in which switching to the second AT state occurs with a higher probability than in the previous state.
In other words, the main control unit 10, as a special game state control means, can control the special game state to a high probability special game state (ATCZ state) in which switching to the second special game state (second AT state) by the special game state switching control means (main control unit 10) is highly likely based on the establishment of predetermined conditions.

Therefore, it is possible to switch to the second AT state in a wider variety of ways, thereby making the game more entertaining.
Furthermore, when the ATCZ state is entered, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for a longer period of time than when a switching lottery is conducted in one game.

In addition, in variant example 4 of the first embodiment, as described above, a lottery may be held to switch directly to the second AT state during a game in the first AT state, in which case there will be cases where the state switches directly to the second AT state and cases where the state switches to the second AT state via the ATCZ state.
In addition, the duration of the ATCZ state and the winning probabilities during the switching lottery during the ATCZ state may be other than those described above.

In addition, in order to prevent the first termination condition from being met during the ATCZ state, when the remaining difference in number of coins becomes a predetermined number or less, the lottery for transition to the ATCZ state may be prohibited.
In addition, during the ATCZ state, updates of various data related to the continuation of the AT state (such as the remaining difference in number of sheets) may be suspended. In this case, when the ATCZ state transitions to the first AT state, the remaining difference in number of sheets at the start of the ATCZ state will be restored and the first AT state will be resumed.
As described above, the third modification of the first embodiment is realized.

The above describes the first embodiment of the slot machine 1. In the first embodiment, switching to the second AT state is possible in all games during the first AT state, but if the number of games in the advantageous zone reaches or exceeds a predetermined number, switching to the second AT state may be prohibited.

In addition, when the AT state starts, the state is transitioned to the first AT state, but initially the state may be transitioned to a second AT state of game number management type, and when the condition for switching to the first AT state during the second AT state is met, the state may be switched to the first AT state of difference number management type.
In this case, it is preferable that the first AT state is more advantageous for the player than the second AT state.
In addition, at the start of the AT state, it may be possible to select whether to enter the first AT state or the second AT state based on the player's operation (e.g., a betting operation).
The slot machine 1 of the first embodiment is configured as described above.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

In the gaming machine of the second embodiment, only some of the control related to the transition of the gaming state and some of the presentation content are different from the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and the rest is the same as the first embodiment.
Therefore, in this second embodiment, only the points that are different from the first embodiment will be described, and the other points are the same as the above-described first embodiment, so the description will be omitted.

[Transition of gaming state during CZ state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment]
First, the transition of the gaming state during the CZ state in the slot machine 1 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 13 and 14.
In the slot machine 1 of this second embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the main control unit 10 controls the transition of each game state, but in this second embodiment, the control related to the CZ state differs from that in the first embodiment.

First, in the first embodiment described above, when a transition to the CZ state is made, the main control unit 10 does not change the lottery control for the transition to the pseudo bonus state during the CZ state, but in this second embodiment, it is possible to change the lottery control for the transition to the pseudo bonus state during the CZ state.
In other words, in this second embodiment, two types of CZ states can occur: a relatively low CZ state (first CZ state) and a relatively high CZ state (second CZ state) in terms of the probability of transitioning to the pseudo bonus state during the CZ state, and when the main control unit 10 transitions to the CZ state, it is possible to control the CZ state to either of the above CZ states.

Figure 13 shows the transition of the game state during the CZ state, achieved by the control of the main control device 10 in this second embodiment.
As shown in Figure 13, the main control unit 10 conducts a transition lottery for the CZ state during the normal gaming state as the first gaming state, and if the transition lottery is won and the transition conditions for the CZ state are met, the gaming state is transitioned from the normal gaming state for a specified period of time to the CZ state as the second gaming state which is advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, when the transition condition for the CZ state is met, a lottery for transition to a second CZ state is held, and when the transition condition for the second CZ state is met as a result of winning this transition lottery, the CZ state is controlled in the second CZ state as a specific second gaming state, and when the transition condition for the second CZ state is not met as a result of not winning the transition lottery for the second CZ state, the CZ state is controlled in the first CZ state as the normal second gaming state.
In other words, if the transition lottery for the CZ state itself is won, a lottery is held to determine the type of CZ state, and this lottery determines whether the control during the CZ state will be the first CZ state (normal second game state) or the second CZ state (specific second game state).

Then, in a game during the first CZ state and the second CZ state, if a transition condition for the pseudo bonus state is met, the game state is transitioned from the CZ state to the pseudo bonus state.
In addition, in a game during the first CZ state and the second CZ state, if the transition condition for the pseudo bonus state is not met and the termination condition for the CZ state set for each CZ state is met, the game state is transitioned from the CZ state to the normal game state.

The main control unit 10, as will be described in detail later, conducts a pseudo-bonus state transition lottery during the first CZ state such that the transition probability to the pseudo-bonus state is relatively low, and conducts a pseudo-bonus state transition lottery during the second CZ state such that the transition probability to the pseudo-bonus state is relatively high.
Therefore, the second CZ state is a more advantageous CZ state for the player than the first CZ state.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of Figure 14, the CZ state transition lottery processing executed by the main control unit 10 will be described.
Figure 14 shows a CZ state transition lottery process executed in the main control unit 10, in which a transition lottery is performed to determine whether or not to transition to the above-mentioned CZ state itself, and a transition lottery is performed to determine whether or not to transition to the second CZ state.

First, in step S1, it is determined whether or not a game has been executed.
This is a determination of whether or not a game has been executed during normal game play. If a game has been executed, processing proceeds to step S2; if a game has not been executed, processing terminates for this CZ state transition lottery process.

Next, in step S2, a determination is made as to whether or not the CZ state transition lottery trigger role has been won.
In step S2, if it is determined that a CZ state transition lottery trigger role (e.g., a weak watermelon role) has been won, the process proceeds to step S3, and if it is determined that the transition lottery trigger role has not been won, the CZ state transition lottery process is terminated.

Next, in step S3, a lottery process for transition to the CZ state is carried out.
The transition lottery process in step S3 is a transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the CZ state itself regardless of the type of CZ state, and a lottery is held to determine whether or not to transition to the CZ state with a predetermined probability.
As will be described in more detail below, the probability of winning the CZ state transition lottery differs depending on whether the state is a low CZ probability state or a high CZ probability state, and the probability of transitioning to the CZ state changes depending on the probability state at that time.

Next, in step S4, it is determined whether or not the CZ state transition lottery has been won.
In step S4, if it is determined that the CZ state transition lottery has been won as a result of the CZ state transition lottery process, the process proceeds to step S5, and if it is determined that the transition lottery has not been won, the CZ state transition lottery process is terminated.

Next, in step S5, a lottery process for transition to the second CZ state is performed.
The transition lottery process in step S5 is a transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition the winning CZ state to a second CZ state, and a lottery is held to determine whether or not to transition to the second CZ state with a predetermined probability.
That is, after a decision is made to transition to the CZ state, a lottery is held to determine whether the CZ state will become the first CZ state or the second CZ state.
As will be described in detail later, the probability of winning the lottery to transition to the second CZ state differs depending on whether the second CZ state is in a low-probability state or a high-probability state, and the probability of transitioning to the second CZ state changes depending on the probability state at that time.

Next, in step S6, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery to the second CZ state has been won.
If it is determined in step S6 that the lottery for transition to the second CZ state has been won, then step S7 is performed.

Then, in step S7, the second CZ state transition flag is set, and in step S8, the first CZ state transition flag is set, after which this CZ state transition lottery process is terminated.
The first CZ state transition flag and the second CZ state transition flag indicate that the right to transition to each CZ state has been granted. These flags are referenced at the start of the CZ state, and the CZ state is controlled to either the first CZ state or the second CZ state depending on the flag.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the CZ state is controlled to either the first CZ state or the second CZ state, which have different probabilities of transitioning to the pseudo bonus state.
Therefore, it is possible to make the game more diverse during the CZ state and to increase the interest of the game.
In addition, the player's sense of expectation can be changed depending on the type of CZ state, and when a transition to the second CZ state occurs, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation.

It should be noted that after the CZ state transition lottery process is performed, a second CZ state transition lottery process is performed. However, the lottery form may be other than that described above as long as the transition to the CZ state itself is determined with a predetermined probability and the type of CZ state to transition to is determined with a predetermined probability.
Also, three or more types of CZ states may be provided.
Also, when the CZ state transition lottery is won, the next game may be transitioned to the CZ state, or the main display 8 may execute a continuous performance of the CZ state (main continuous performance) for a predetermined number of games (for example, 3 games) before transitioning to the CZ state. Also, when the CZ state transition lottery trigger role is won but the CZ state transition lottery is not won (or in part), a fake continuous performance of the CZ state may be executed.
As described above, the transition of the gaming state during the CZ state is performed in the gaming machine of the second embodiment.

[Probability state for transition of CZ state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment]
Next, referring to Figure 15, we will explain the probability state for the transition of the CZ state realized by the control of the main control device 10 in the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment.

In the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, as described above, the main control unit 10 performs a transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the CZ state itself (the first CZ state or the second CZ state) based on the winning of a specified rare role (e.g., a weak watermelon role), and if the transition lottery is won, the game state is transitioned to the CZ state.

In addition, the main control device 10 can control the transition lottery for the CZ state itself (first CZ state or second CZ state) in the normal game state with two types of probability states (probability state A): a CZ low probability state in which the CZ state is entered with a relatively low probability, and a CZ high probability state in which the CZ state is entered with a relatively high probability, and this probability state A can change the expectation for the transition of the CZ state itself.

As mentioned above, when the main control device 10 decides to transition to the CZ state itself, it performs a transition lottery (selection lottery) to determine whether to transition the CZ state to the first CZ state or the second CZ state. The transition lottery for the second CZ state can also be controlled with two types of probability states (probability state B): a second CZ low probability state in which the second CZ state is entered with a relatively low probability, and a second CZ high probability state as a specific first game state in which the second CZ state is entered with a relatively high probability. This probability state B makes it possible to change the expectation for transitioning to the second CZ state.

Figure 15 shows transitions according to the progress of the game in probability state A, which specifies the transition probability of the CZ state itself, and probability state B, which specifies the transition probability of the second CZ state.
First, probability state A is set to transition to a CZ low probability state when the main control unit 10 is reset (including when the settings are changed), and a transition related to probability state A is made depending on the result of the promotion lottery in the game during this CZ low probability state.

As shown in Figure 15, in a game (at the start of the game) when probability state A is in a CZ low probability state, a promotion lottery is held for probability state A, and if this promotion lottery is won (timing t1), from the next game, probability state A will transition from a CZ low probability state to a CZ high probability state (timing t2).
Therefore, by transitioning from a low-probability CZ state to a high-probability CZ state, the transition probability of the CZ state itself will be changed from a low state to a high state.

In addition, in a game (at the start of the game) in which the probability state A is in a CZ high probability state, a demotion lottery is held for the probability state A, and if this demotion lottery is won (timing t4), from the next game the probability state A will transition from the CZ high probability state to the CZ low probability state (timing t5).
Therefore, a transition from a high-probability CZ state to a low-probability CZ state will change the transition probability of the CZ state itself from a high to a low state.
Details of the promotion lottery and demotion lottery regarding the probability state A will be described later.

In addition, the main control device 10 controls the transition to probability state B separately from probability state A, and controls switching between the second CZ low probability state and the second CZ high probability state at a specified time.

In this second embodiment, when the main control unit 10 is reset (including when the settings are changed), the probability state B during normal game play is transitioned to a second CZ low probability state, and when a predetermined number of games (e.g., 100 times) have been played in the second CZ low probability state, the probability state transitions from the second CZ low probability state to the second CZ high probability state, and thereafter, when a predetermined number of games (e.g., 30 times) have been played in the second CZ high probability state, the probability state transitions from the second CZ high probability state to the second CZ low probability state, and thereafter, the switching control of the probability state B is basically performed at the same time.
As will be described in detail later, the duration of the second CZ high probability state may be extended based on the satisfaction of certain conditions.

Therefore, as shown in the figure, when a predetermined number of games (e.g., 100) are played in the second CZ low probability state and the number of games required for promotion to the second CZ high probability state is reached, the probability state B will transition from the second CZ low probability state to the second CZ high probability state from that game (timing t3).

In addition, when a predetermined number of games (e.g., 30) are played in the second CZ high probability state and the number of games required for demotion to the second CZ low probability state is reached, the probability state B from that game will transition from the second CZ high probability state to the second CZ low probability state (timing t6).
The timing for switching between each probability state may be the start or end of the game, which is the trigger for the switch.

Probability state B does not affect the transition lottery for the CZ state itself, but rather changes the transition probability to the second CZ state if the transition lottery for the CZ state itself is won at that time. Therefore, if the transition lottery for the CZ state itself is won in the second CZ low probability state, the transition probability to the second CZ state becomes relatively low, and if the transition lottery for the CZ state itself is won in the second CZ high probability state, the transition probability to the second CZ state becomes relatively high.

In addition, since the main control unit 10 concurrently manages probability state A and probability state B as probability states related to the CZ state during the normal game state, various combinations of probability states are formed by probability state A and probability state B.
For example, in a game between timing t2 and timing t3 as shown in the figure, probability state A becomes a CZ high probability state, and probability state B becomes a second CZ low probability state, so that only the transition probability of the CZ state itself is controlled in the high probability state.
Therefore, during this period, it is easy to transition to the CZ state itself, but even if it does transition to the CZ state itself, it becomes difficult to transition to the second CZ state.

Furthermore, in the game between timing t3 and timing t5 shown in the figure, probability state A becomes a CZ high probability state, and further probability state B becomes a CZ overlapping high probability state in which it becomes a second CZ high probability state, so that the transition probability of the CZ state itself is controlled in a high probability state, and furthermore the transition probability of the second CZ state is also controlled in a high probability state.
Therefore, during this period, it is easy to transition to the CZ state itself, and when it has transitioned to the CZ state itself, it is also easy to transition to the second CZ state.

In addition, in the game between timing t5 and timing t6 shown in the figure, probability state A becomes a CZ low probability state, and probability state B becomes a second CZ high probability state, so that only the transition probability of the second CZ state is controlled in the high probability state.
Therefore, during this period, it is difficult to transition to the CZ state itself, but once the transition to the CZ state itself has occurred, it becomes easier to transition to the second CZ state.

As described above, under the control of the main control unit 10, when a specified role is won in the CZ low probability state during the normal gaming state, the probability state A during the normal gaming state is changed to the CZ high probability state.
In other words, the main control device 10, as a game control means, is equipped with a probability control means that can control the occurrence probability of the second game state (CZ state) to a high probability first game state (CZ high probability state) based on the result of the game in the first game state (normal game state).
Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation regarding the occurrence of the CZ state itself.

In addition, when the number of games played during the second CZ low probability state in the normal game state reaches the number of games required for promotion to the second CZ high probability state (e.g., 100 games), the main control unit 10 will change the probability state B during the normal game state to the second CZ high probability state for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 games).
In other words, the main control device 10 is equipped with a game control means that can control the occurrence of a second game state (CZ state) during a specified period during a first game state (normal game state) to a specific first game state (second CZ high probability state) in which control related to the occurrence of the second game state (CZ state) is advantageous to the player.
Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation regarding the occurrence of the second CZ state.

In addition, the main control device 10, as a game control means, is capable of controlling the game to a specific first game state (second CZ high probability state) based on the number of times the game has been executed during the first game state (normal game state) reaching a predetermined number of times.
Therefore, a high probability state of the second CZ will occur as the game progresses, making it possible to realize a highly exciting game in which the player's expectations gradually increase as the game progresses.
Furthermore, even if no bonus is obtained after playing the game multiple times, the second CZ high probability state will occur if the game is played a predetermined number of times, thereby making it possible to increase the player's motivation to play.

In addition, since the main control unit 10 separately manages and controls probability state A and probability state B, the transition probability of the CZ state itself and the transition probability (selection probability) of the first CZ state and the second CZ state change in various ways, which makes it possible to diversify the game content related to the transition of the CZ state and increase the interest of the game.
In addition, various combinations of each probability state will arise, making it possible to diversify the game content related to the transition of the CZ state.
It is also possible to create a CZ overlap high probability state in which both probability states are high probability states, thereby greatly increasing the player's sense of anticipation.

In this second embodiment, when 100 games have been played in the second CZ low probability state, the state is transitioned to the second CZ high probability state, and when 30 games have been played in the second CZ high probability state, the state is transitioned to the second CZ low probability state, but the number of games transitioning to each probability state may be other than those mentioned above.
In addition, the trigger for changing probability state B may be other than the above, and the number of times a specified role is won may be counted, and when the counting result reaches a specified number, a transition to each probability state related to probability state B may be made.
As described above, a transition of the probability state in response to a transition of the CZ state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment is performed.

[Various lotteries related to the CZ state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment]
Next, with reference to Figures 16 to 18, various lotteries regarding the CZ state in the gaming machine of this second embodiment will be explained.

First, referring to Figure 16, we will explain the probability of promotion to the CZ high probability state and the probability of demotion to the CZ low probability state for probability state A.
As described above, the main control unit 10 manages the probability state A and controls the transition (or maintenance) between the CZ low probability state and the CZ high probability state.
In this second embodiment, the probability state A is managed by conducting a lottery for transition from a low probability CZ state to a high probability CZ state (promotion lottery), and a lottery for transition from a high probability CZ state to a low probability CZ state (demotion lottery), based on the results of the lottery for the roles during the normal game state in the main control unit 10.

FIG. 16 shows the probability of transition to each probability state based on the result of the lottery for the winning combination, which is realized by the control of the main control unit 10.
First, Figure 16 (a) shows the probability of promotion (winning probability) to a CZ high probability state in a transition lottery when each role is won in a CZ low probability state during normal game play.
As shown in Figure 16 (a), when a weak cherry role is won, a transition lottery is held to determine a 70% probability of not being promoted to the CZ high probability state (maintaining the CZ low probability state) and a 30% probability of being promoted to the CZ high probability state.

Similarly, if you win a role other than the Weak Cherry role (including a miss), there is a 100% chance that you will not be promoted to the CZ High Probability state (you will remain in the CZ Low Probability state). In other words, if the lottery result is anything other than the Weak Cherry role, a transition lottery will be held so that you will not be promoted to the CZ High Probability state.

Next, Figure 16 (b) shows the probability of downgrading to a CZ low probability state (probability of winning) in a transition lottery when each role is won in a CZ high probability state during normal game play.
As shown in Figure 16 (b), when the push order bell role is won, a transition lottery is held to determine with a 95% probability that there will be no demotion to the CZ low probability state (maintaining the CZ high probability state), and with a 5% probability that there will be a demotion to the CZ low probability state.

Similarly, if you win a role other than the Push Order Bell role (including a miss), there is a 100% chance that you will not be demoted to the CZ low probability state (the CZ high probability state will be maintained). In other words, for lottery results other than the Push Order Bell role, a transition lottery is held to ensure that you will not be demoted to the CZ low probability state.

As described above, promotion and demotion lotteries related to probability state A are conducted with a predetermined probability according to the results of the lottery for the role during the normal game state, making it possible to reliably manage probability state A.
Furthermore, when a game is executed, the player will pay attention to things other than the awarding of benefits such as a pseudo bonus state, making it possible to increase the entertainment value of the game.
Furthermore, if the player wins the promotion lottery trigger role, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, the trigger role for the promotion lottery and the trigger role for the demotion lottery may be other than those described above, and each trigger role may be set to multiple types of roles.
In addition, the promotion probability and demotion probability when each role is won may be probabilities other than those mentioned above.

Next, referring to Figure 17, we will explain the winning probability of the CZ state itself and the winning probability of the second CZ state.

As mentioned above, in the main control unit 10, during a game in the normal game state, a transition lottery for the CZ state itself (step S3 in Figure 14) is conducted, and if this transition lottery is won, the game state will transition from the normal game state as the first game state to the CZ state as the second game state (the right to transition is granted).
In addition, when the transition lottery for the CZ state itself is won, a transition lottery for the second CZ state (step S5 in Figure 14) is held, and if this transition lottery is won, the transitioned CZ state is controlled in the second CZ state as a specific second game state, and if the transition lottery is not won, the transitioned CZ state is controlled in the first CZ state as the normal second game state.
Also, as mentioned above, the transition lottery for the CZ state itself is performed based on probability state A, and the transition lottery for the second CZ state is performed based on probability state B.

First, Figure 17 (a) shows the probability of winning in the transition lottery to the CZ state itself based on the result of the lottery for the role during the normal game state, which is realized by the control of the main control unit 10.
As shown in Figure 17 (a), when probability state A during the normal game state is a CZ low probability state and a weak watermelon role is won, a transition lottery is held so that there is a 90% probability of not winning the CZ state and a 10% probability of winning the CZ state.
Similarly, when probability state A is a high probability CZ state and a weak watermelon role is won, a transition lottery is held so that there is a 70% probability of not winning the CZ state and a 30% probability of winning the CZ state.

In addition, when the probability state A during the normal game state is in the CZ low probability state and a role other than the weak watermelon role is won, there is a 100% probability that the CZ state will not be won, and a transition lottery is held to ensure that the CZ state will not be won.
Similarly, when probability state A is in the CZ high probability state and a role other than the weak watermelon role is won, a transition lottery is held so that there is a 90% probability of not winning the CZ state and a 10% probability of winning the CZ state.

As described above, the transition lottery to the CZ state itself is mainly triggered by the winning of a weak watermelon role, and the probability of winning the CZ state itself is higher in the CZ high probability state than in the CZ low probability state.
Therefore, it is possible to reliably change the winning probability of the CZ state itself based on probability state A.
Furthermore, if a weak watermelon role is won regardless of the state of probability state A, it is possible to increase the player's expectations, and if a weak watermelon role is won during a high probability CZ state, it is possible to further increase the player's expectations.

Furthermore, during the CZ high probability state, there is a possibility of winning the CZ state itself even if a role other than the weak watermelon role is won.
Therefore, it is possible to greatly increase the player's sense of expectation in a high CZ probability state.
In addition, the trigger role for the transition lottery to the CZ state itself may be other than the above, and multiple types of roles may be set as the trigger role.
In addition, the probability of winning when the trigger role for the transition lottery to the CZ state itself is won may be other than those mentioned above.

Next, Figure 17 (b) shows the probability of winning in the lottery for transition to the second CZ state when the CZ state is won.
As shown in Figure 17 (b), when probability state B is in the second CZ low probability state and a CZ state is selected, a transition lottery is held so that there is an 80% probability of not selecting the second CZ state and a 20% probability of selecting the second CZ state.

Similarly, when probability state B is in the second CZ high probability state and the CZ state is selected, a transition lottery is held so that there is a 50% probability of not selecting the CZ state and a 50% probability of selecting the CZ state.
If the result of the transition lottery is that the second CZ state is selected, the state will transition to the second CZ state, and if the result is that the second CZ state is not selected, the state will transition to the first CZ state.

As described above, when the probability state B at the time of winning the CZ state transition lottery is the second CZ high probability state, the main control unit 10 performs lottery control so that the probability of transitioning to the second CZ state is higher than when the probability state B is the second CZ low probability state.
In other words, the main control unit 10, as a game control means, is capable of executing control in a specific first game state (second CZ high probability state) that increases the probability of occurrence of a specific second game state compared to a first game state other than the specific first game state (for example, the second CZ low probability state).

Therefore, it is possible to reliably change the probability of transitioning to the second CZ state based on the probability state B.
Furthermore, if the CZ state itself is won during the second CZ high probability state, it is possible to further increase the player's sense of anticipation.
In addition, the winning probability of the transition lottery to the second CZ state may be other than the above, as long as it is higher in the second CZ high probability state than in the second CZ low probability state.

Next, referring to Figure 18, we will explain the lottery for adding the number of games to the number of continuation games in the second CZ high probability state.

As mentioned above, in this second embodiment, probability state B during normal gameplay transitions to the second CZ low probability state when the main control device 10 is reset (including when the settings are changed), and when a predetermined number of games are played in the second CZ low probability state during normal gameplay, the state transitions from the second CZ low probability state to the second CZ high probability state, and then when a predetermined number of games are played in the second CZ high probability state, the state transitions from the second CZ high probability state to the second CZ low probability state, and thereafter, the switching control of probability state B is basically performed at the same time.

The number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state is set to a basic number of games (e.g., 30 games) in the initial state, and when this basic number of games is played during the second CZ high probability state, the second CZ high probability state ends. However, in a game in the second CZ low probability state before transitioning to the second CZ high probability state, an additional lottery (extension lottery) is held to add (add) a predetermined number of games to the basic number of games in the subsequent second CZ high probability state, and if this additional lottery is won, the predetermined number of games is added (added) to the basic number of games, and the number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state is added and updated in advance.
Therefore, the second CZ low probability state and the second CZ high probability state will alternate during the normal game state, and in each second CZ low probability state, an additional lottery (extension lottery) will be held for the duration of the second CZ high probability state that follows immediately thereafter.

In addition, the above-mentioned additional lottery is continuously executed during the second CZ low probability state, and each time the additional lottery is won, the number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state is added and updated in advance.
Therefore, the number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state is extended by an indefinite number of games until the transition to the second CZ high probability state occurs, and the actual number of continuing games changes depending on the result of the additional lottery during the immediately preceding second CZ low probability state.

Figure 18 shows the result of an add-on lottery (extension lottery) in a game during the second CZ low-probability state, which is realized by the control of the main control unit 10, and shows the probability of adding on the number of games (probability of winning) for the number of continuing games in the second CZ high-probability state immediately afterwards.
In addition, the above-mentioned additional lottery is executed when a rare role is won in a game during the second CZ low probability state.

As shown in Figure 18, when a weak rare role is won in a game during the second CZ low probability state in normal game mode, a lottery for adding games is held so that there is an 85% probability of 0 games being added (no addition), a 10% probability of 5 games being added, and a 5% probability of 10 games being added.
In addition, if a strong rare role is won in a game during the low probability state of the second CZ, an add-on lottery (extension lottery) is held with a 50% probability of 0 games being added (no add-on), a 40% probability of 5 games being added, and a 10% probability of 10 games being added.

As a result of the above-mentioned addition lottery, the determined number of games is added to the number of games continued in the second CZ high probability state immediately after that. In addition, the number of continued games is added for each addition lottery, and the duration of the second CZ high probability state is extended by that amount.
In addition, if a weak watermelon role is won during the normal game state, the lottery for transition to the CZ state itself is also held separately from the above-mentioned additional lottery, and if the lottery for transition to the CZ state itself is won, the result of the above-mentioned additional lottery will be invalidated.

As described above, the main control unit 10 executes in advance an additional lottery for the number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state immediately following a game in the second CZ low probability state in the normal game play state before transitioning to the second CZ high probability state, and if the additional lottery is won, the number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state is extended by the number of added games.
In other words, the main control unit 10, as a game control means, is equipped with an extension lottery control means that can execute an extension lottery (additional lottery) that can extend the duration of a specific first game state (second CZ high probability state) before the occurrence of the specific first game state.

Therefore, the number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state changes in various ways, making it possible to play an exciting game that changes the player's expectations.
Furthermore, if the duration of the second CZ high probability state is extended by an additional lottery, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation.
Furthermore, since the extension of the duration of the second CZ high probability state is determined in a game during the immediately preceding second CZ low probability state, it is possible to increase the player's expectations and interest in the game from the point in the second CZ low probability state before the transition to the second CZ high probability state.
In addition, the trigger role for the lottery to add to the number of games for the number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state may be other than the above, or multiple trigger roles may be set, and the winning probability when each trigger role is won may be other than the above.
As described above, various lotteries are conducted regarding the CZ state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment.

[Various effects related to the CZ state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment]
Next, with reference to Figures 19 to 22, various presentations related to the CZ state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment will be explained.
In this second embodiment, the main control unit 10 performs various controls related to the CZ state, and the main control unit 10 transmits control information related to the CZ state to the sub-control unit 20, and the sub-control unit 20 executes various performances by displaying a specified performance image related to the CZ state on the main display 8 based on the received control information.
In response to the execution of various effects on the main display 8, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 9, and a predetermined decorative light is output from the lamp 11.

First, referring to FIG. 19, we will explain the image displayed on the main display 8 when an additional lottery is held for the number of games to be continued in the second CZ high probability state during a game in the second CZ low probability state.

As described above, in this second embodiment, the main control device 10 executes an additional lottery (extension lottery) for the number of continued games in the second CZ high probability state during a game in the second CZ low probability state in the normal game state, while the sub-control device 20 executes an additional effect for the number of continued games by displaying an effect image related to the above-mentioned additional lottery on the main display device 8.

Figure 19 (a) shows a presentation image on the main display 8 in a game during the normal game state in which probability state A is a CZ low probability state and probability state B is a second CZ low probability state.
As shown in FIG. 19(a), during the normal gaming state, a normal gaming state image 30 is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8 to notify that the game is in the normal gaming state.

The normal game state image 30 is configured with the same images as those in the first embodiment described above, and for example, a moving image of a stage in which a main character advances through a grassland is displayed.
Also, as mentioned above, during the normal game state, the probability of the lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state can also be changed, so when the probability state of the lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state is changed from the normal probability state to a high probability state, the background of the stage is changed from a daytime background to an evening background to notify the player that the high probability state is being reached.

In this second embodiment, in addition to notifying the probability state related to the transition lottery for the pseudo bonus state, notification of probability state A and probability state B, which are the probability states related to various transition lotteries in the CZ state, is also performed by changing the normal game state image 30.

That is, as shown in Figure 19 (a), in a game during a normal game state in which probability state A is a CZ low probability state and probability state B is a second CZ low probability state, a character A image 30a in which the main character included in the normal game state image 30 is wearing blue clothing will be displayed with a predetermined probability.
The color of the clothing of this character A image 30a (blue) notifies (suggests) that probability state A is a CZ low probability state, and probability state B is a second CZ low probability state.

In the above state, at a specified probability when a specified rare role is won and probability state A transitions to a CZ high probability state, the main character will be changed to character B image 30b wearing yellow clothing, as shown in the figure, and it will be announced (suggested) that probability state A has become a CZ high probability state and probability state B has become a second CZ low probability state.
However, as will be described in detail later, when probability state B is the second CZ low probability state, the color of the protagonist character's clothing does not completely match that of probability state A, and image selection control is performed so that in the CZ low probability state, there is a high probability that the protagonist character's clothing will be blue, and in the CZ high probability state, there is a high probability that the protagonist character's clothing will be yellow.
In other words, the color of the main character's clothing suggests probability state A.

Next, Figure 19 (b) shows a presentation image on the main display 8 when the player wins the lottery to add to the number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state described above from the state shown in Figure 19 (a) above.
As shown in FIG. 19(b), the main display 8 continues to display the normal game state image 30 including the character A image 30a.

In this state, if the lottery for adding the number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state is won, a specific image corresponding to the number of games that will be added by winning the lottery for adding the number of continuing games will be displayed.
In this second embodiment, the specific image displayed is an image of firewood resembling wood used as fuel, for use in the presentation during the high probability state of the second CZ, which will be described later.

The firewood image can change depending on the number of added games, for example, when 5 games are added, a relatively small firewood image is displayed, and when 10 games are added, a relatively large firewood image is displayed.
In other words, the display of the firewood image provides advance notification of the extended period of the second CZ high probability state.

Figure 19 (b) shows a case where the number of additional games added in advance is 10 games as a result of a lottery to add to the number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state, so a large firewood image, a firewood A image 31a, is additionally displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the main display 8 together with the game status image 30.
In other words, in a game during the normal game state in which probability state B is the second CZ low probability state, a lottery is held in advance to add to the number of continued games to the second CZ high probability state to which the transition will immediately follow, and a firewood image is displayed corresponding to the number of games that will be added as a result of winning this additional lottery, thereby notifying in advance, even before the transition to the second CZ high probability state, that a predetermined number of games will be added to the number of continued games and the duration of the second CZ high probability state will be extended.
In addition, the size of the displayed firewood image also indicates the degree of extension of the duration of the second CZ high probability state.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 19 (b), when the firewood A image 31a is displayed, it is notified in advance that the number of continuing games will be extended by 10 games in the subsequent second CZ high probability state.
The firewood image will continue to be displayed until the transition to the second CZ high probability state occurs.
Also, even when the normal game state image 30 including the character B image 30b is displayed, the firewood image is displayed in the same manner.

Next, Figure 19 (c) shows the presentation image on the main display 8 when the player wins the lottery to add another number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state from the state shown in Figure 19 (b) above, and shows the presentation image when the additional number of additional games of 5 games is added in advance as a result of the lottery to add another number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state.
As shown in Figure 19 (c), when the number of additional games is added in advance by 5 games, a small firewood image, a firewood B image 31b, is displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the main display 8, to the left of the firewood A image 31a that is already displayed, together with the game status image 30.

Therefore, when the firewood A image 31a and the firewood B image 31b are displayed, it is notified in advance that in the subsequent second CZ high probability state, the number of continuing games will be extended by 15 games by adding 10 games and 5 games respectively.
Also, although not shown in the figure, if a player wins the lottery to add to the number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state again in a subsequent game during the second CZ low probability state, an additional firewood image corresponding to each win will be displayed.
In addition, it is preferable that the number of added games in the number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state and the firewood image corresponding to the added number of games are initialized when the game area transitions to the normal area.

As described above, under the control of the main control unit 10, when a game in the second CZ low probability state wins the lottery to add to the number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state (extension lottery), the sub-control unit 20 will cause a firewood image corresponding to the win to appear on the main display 8, thereby notifying the player in advance, before the transition to the second CZ high probability state, that the number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state will be extended, and the number of games to be added.
In other words, the sub-controller 20 is equipped with a notification control means that can notify information (firewood image) regarding the extension of the duration of the specific first gaming state (second CZ high probability state) before the specific first gaming state occurs, based on the result of the extension lottery by the main controller 10 as an extension lottery control means.

Therefore, it is possible to reliably increase the player's sense of expectation from a game that is in the second CZ low probability state and has not yet transitioned to the second CZ high probability state.
In addition, it is possible to implement a highly entertaining game in which the player's sense of expectation changes depending on the size of the displayed firewood image.
Furthermore, since the player can confirm the appearance of the firewood image before the transition to the second CZ high probability state, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is at a disadvantage, such as ending the game before the transition to the second CZ high probability state, even though the second CZ high probability state will be extended thereafter.

Furthermore, in a game during the second CZ low probability state, if a player wins the lottery to add to the number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state, an additional firewood image corresponding to each win will be displayed, and the number of games will be notified in advance for each addition to the number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state.
Therefore, the player can confirm that the number of continuing games in the high probability state of the second CZ has been extended each time with the addition of the firewood image, making it possible to play a highly exciting game in which the player's expectations gradually increase.
Furthermore, when a plurality of firewood images are displayed, it is possible to significantly increase the player's sense of expectation.

In this second embodiment, the lottery result for the number of games continued in the second CZ high probability state is notified by the display of a firewood image, but the manner in which the lottery result for the number of games continued in the second CZ high probability state may be notified in a manner other than the above. For example, the same firewood image may be displayed regardless of the number of games added, or one firewood image may be displayed and changed to a larger one each time the number of games is added.
In addition, the numerical information of the number of added games may be displayed as is.
In addition, although the number of added games is notified by the firewood image, the number of added games may be notified by displaying other images.

Next, referring to FIG. 20, we will explain the presentation image on the main display 8 when the number of games in the second CZ high probability state is extended during a game in the second CZ high probability state.

As described above, in this second embodiment, when the main control unit 10 is in the second CZ high probability state, if a transition to the CZ state is decided at that time, the probability of transitioning to the second CZ state increases, but the number of continuing games in this second CZ high probability state is extended by adding the number of games added during the second CZ low probability state to the basic number of games.
In addition, the sub-control device 20 is configured to execute various effects on the main display 8 to notify the player of the second CZ high probability state and the extension of the duration of the second CZ high probability state.

First, Figure 20 (a) shows a presentation image on the main display 8 in a game during the normal game state in which probability state A is a CZ low probability state and probability state B is a second CZ high probability state.
As shown in FIG. 20(a), during the normal gaming state, a normal gaming state image 30 is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8 to notify that the game is in the normal gaming state, in the same manner as described above.
In addition, there are cases where probability state B becomes the second CZ high probability state and probability state A becomes the CZ high probability state, but this will be described later.

In addition, in a game during the normal game state in which the probability state B is the second CZ high probability state, a character C image 30c in which the main character included in the normal game state image 30 is wearing red clothing will be displayed.
The color (red) of the clothing of this character C image 30c indicates that the probability state B has become the second CZ high probability state.
Furthermore, when the probability state B is the second CZ high probability state, the character C image 30c will be displayed regardless of the state of the probability state A.

The main display 8 will continue to display the firewood image that was displayed in the second CZ low probability state, and Figure 20(a) shows the case where the firewood A image 31a and the firewood B image 31b are displayed, so in this case, in the second CZ high probability state, it will be announced that 10 games and 5 games will be added to the basic number of games.

In addition, a predetermined image is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the main display 8 to notify that the probability state B at that time is the second CZ high probability state, and the duration of the second CZ high probability state.
In the second embodiment, a flame image resembling a flame is displayed as the specified image, and the display of this flame image notifies the second CZ high probability state and its duration.

In addition, the flame images are provided in different sizes: large, medium and small, and the largest sized flame image is displayed at the beginning of the second CZ high probability state, and when the number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state becomes 10 games remaining, the image is changed to a medium sized flame image, and when the number of continuing games becomes 5 games remaining, the image is changed to the smallest sized flame image, and finally, when there are no more continuing games left, the flame image is erased and the end of the second CZ high probability state is announced.
Therefore, since Figure 20 (a) shows the initial time when transitioning to the second CZ high probability state, a large flame A image 32a of maximum size (a size corresponding to the basic number of games) will be displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the main display 8.
The large flame A image 32a is colored orange, and as will be described in detail later, this color changes depending on the probability state A at that time.

Then, when the game is played during the second CZ high probability state and the number of continuing games remaining is 5, the size is changed to the smallest small flame A image 32b, as shown in Figure 20 (b).
In other words, the presence or absence of a flame image indicates whether or not the second CZ high probability state is in effect, and the size of the flame image indicates (suggests) the number of games remaining during which the second CZ high probability state will continue.

Also, as shown in FIG. 20(b), when there are 5 continuing games remaining and a firewood image is being displayed, i.e., when there are unadded games remaining, an extended effect is executed with a video showing the firewood B image 31b, which has the smallest added game count, being dropped into the small flame A image 32b.

Then, when the above-mentioned extension effect is executed, the flame image is changed from the small flame A image 32b to a medium-sized flame A image 32c, as shown in FIG. 20(c).
In other words, since the firewood B image 31b corresponds to an additional number of 5 games, 5 games are added to the remaining number of continuing games (5 games), and the change to the medium flame A image 32c indicates that the remaining number of continuing games has been extended to 10 games.
In this way, the flame image does not have the number of added games added from the beginning, but the size of the flame image corresponds to the remaining number of continuing games before the number of added games is added, and the size of the flame image can change from a small flame image to a medium flame image, or from a small flame image to a large flame image, depending on the number of games added.

Although not shown in the figure, when the number of continuing games remains at 5 again as a result of subsequent game execution, an extension effect is again executed in which the firewood A image 31a, which corresponds to the addition of the remaining 10 games, is inserted into the small flame A image 32b, and at this time the flame image is changed from the small flame A image 32b to the large flame A image 32a.
In addition, in order to perform the effect of changing the flame image, it is preferable for the sub-control device 20 to manage information related to the duration of the second CZ high probability state separately as the number of continued games before the addition, the number of added games for each addition lottery, and the number of continued games after the addition.
Furthermore, the order in which the firewood images are added to the flame image (the order in which they are placed on top of each other) may be other than the above.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the display of the character C image 30c and the flame image notifies the user that the second CZ high probability state is in progress.
Therefore, it is possible to reliably allow the player to recognize that the second CZ is in a high probability state, thereby increasing the player's sense of expectation.
In addition, the size of the flame image indicates the duration of the second CZ high probability state (the number of remaining continuing games).
Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind while checking the duration of the second CZ high probability state.

In addition, when the flame image becomes smaller, an extension effect is executed in which a firewood image corresponding to the extended period of the second CZ high probability state is inserted, thereby notifying the player that the second CZ high probability state has been extended by adding to the number of games.
In other words, the sub-control device 20, as a notification control means, is capable of executing presentations related to the extension of a specific first game state by using a first image (flame image) capable of notifying the duration of the specific first game state (second CZ high probability state) displayed on the display means (main display 8), and a second image (firewood image) capable of notifying the extended period of the specific first game state displayed on the display means.
Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to recognize in a highly interesting manner that the second CZ high probability state has been extended, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the presence of the firewood image provides advance notice that the high probability state of the second CZ will be extended.
Therefore, when a firewood image is present, the player can play the game during the high probability state of the second CZ with peace of mind.

Next, referring to FIG. 21, we will explain the image presentation on the main display 8 when probability state A is changed in a game in which probability state B is in the second CZ high probability state.

As described above, in this second embodiment, the main control unit 10 is configured to control (manage) probability state A and probability state B separately, so that a state will arise in which probability state B is the second CZ high probability state and probability state A is a CZ low probability state, and a state in which probability state B is the second CZ high probability state and probability state A is a CZ high probability state.
In addition, the sub-control device 20 is configured to execute various effects to notify the state when the probability state A is changed in the second CZ high probability state on the main display 8.

First, FIG. 21(a) shows the image displayed on the main display 8 during normal gameplay when probability state A is a CZ high probability state and probability state B is also a second CZ high probability state, i.e., a CZ overlapping high probability state (timings t3 to t5 in FIG. 15), particularly at the beginning of the second CZ high probability state.

As shown in FIG. 21(a), during the normal gaming state, a normal gaming state image 30 is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8 to notify that the game is in the normal gaming state, in the same manner as described above.
At this time, if the probability state B is the second CZ high probability state, the main character included in the normal game state image 30 will be displayed as a character C image 30c wearing red clothing.
Also, FIG. 20(a) shows a state in which 10 games and 5 games are added thereafter, so that a firewood A image 31a and a firewood B image 31b are displayed.

In addition, a flame image will be displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the main display 8, and when the probability state A is a CZ high probability state (CZ overlapping high probability state), this flame image will be displayed as a large flame B image 32d colored blue, as shown in the figure.
In other words, when the probability state A at that time is a CZ low probability state, a large flame A image 32a colored in orange will be displayed, but when it is a CZ high probability state, a large flame B image 32d colored in blue will be displayed.

This notifies that probability state A is a CZ high probability state, and that the transition lottery to the CZ state itself will be executed with a high probability, and further that probability state B is a second CZ high probability state, and that the transition lottery to the second CZ state will be executed with a high probability.
Furthermore, even if the size of the flame image changes due to a decrease in the number of continuing games or if an extended performance is executed, the color scheme of the flame image is maintained, and for example, the large flame B image 32d is changed to a medium flame B image (or a small flame B image) while maintaining the blue color scheme.

Next, FIG. 21(b) shows the presentation image on the main display 8 during normal game play when probability state B is in the second CZ high probability state and probability state A transitions from the CZ high probability state to the CZ low probability state.

As shown in Figure 21 (b), when probability state B is in the second CZ high probability state and probability state A transitions from the CZ high probability state to the CZ low probability state, the color scheme of the blue large flame B image 32d that had been displayed until then is changed and an orange large flame A image 32a is displayed.
This notifies the player that probability state B is a second CZ high probability state, and the transition lottery to the second CZ state will be executed with a high probability, but that probability state A is a CZ low probability state, and the transition lottery to the CZ state itself will be executed with a normal probability.

As described above, the sub-control unit 20 displays a flame image and further turns the flame image blue, thereby indicating that probability state B is a second CZ high probability state and that probability state A is a CZ high probability state.
In other words, the sub-control device 20 is equipped with a duplicate notification control means capable of notifying that it is controlled to a specific first gaming state (second CZ high probability state) and also to a high probability first gaming state (CZ high probability state).

Therefore, the player can reliably recognize that probability state B is the second CZ high probability state and probability state A is the CZ high probability state, making it possible to greatly increase the player's sense of expectation.
In addition, the visible display of the flame image indicates that probability state B is the second CZ high probability state, and the color scheme (blue) of the displayed flame image indicates that probability state A is the CZ high probability state, so that the player can recognize at a glance that both probability states are high probability states, making it possible to provide more efficient and effective notification.

In addition, by changing the color scheme of the flame image, a state change in probability state A is notified while the second CZ high probability state is still being notified.
Therefore, the state change in probability state A during the second CZ high probability state can be notified without any sense of incongruity, allowing the player to recognize both probability states while remaining concentrated on the game.

Although the color scheme of the flame image is used to indicate a change in probability state A, the pattern or shape of the flame image may be changed to indicate a change in probability state A.
In addition, various effects related to the CZ state may be executed by the sub-display unit 17, or may be executed by both the main display unit 8 and the sub-display unit 17.

Next, with reference to Figure 22, the control of various presentation images according to probability state A and probability state B will be described.
As mentioned above, the sub-controller 20 notifies players regarding probability state A and probability state B by changing the image of the main character and the flame image in the normal game state image 30 on the main display 8 based on control information from the main controller 10.

In other words, in the second CZ low-probability state, the sub-control unit 20 selects the color scheme of the protagonist character's clothing with a predetermined probability depending on the probability state A, thereby notifying (indicating) the probability state A in the second CZ low-probability state.
On the other hand, in the second CZ high probability state, the color scheme of the flame image is selected with a predetermined probability according to the probability state A, thereby notifying the probability state A in the second CZ high probability state.

Figure 22 shows the selection rate of each effect image by the sub-controller 20, which indicates the probability of maintaining or changing the color scheme of the main character's clothing in a game during the second CZ low probability state, and the probability of maintaining or changing the color scheme of the flame image in a game during the second CZ high probability state.

First, Figures 22(a) and 22(b) show the probability of maintaining or changing the color scheme of the main character's clothing in a game during the second CZ low probability state.

As shown in Figure 22 (a), in a game during the second CZ low probability state in the normal game state, when a character A image (e.g., character A image 30a in Figure 19) in which the main character's clothing is blue is displayed, if the probability state A at that time is the CZ low probability state, it is decided with a 95% probability that the character A image will be maintained, and with a 5% probability that it will be changed to a character B image (e.g., character B image 30b in Figure 19) in which the clothing is yellow.
Similarly, if the probability state A at that time is a CZ high probability state, it is decided with a 60% probability that the character A image will be maintained, and with a 40% probability that it will be changed to the character B image.

Also, as shown in Figure 22 (b), in a game during the second CZ low probability state in the normal game state, when the character B image is displayed and the probability state A at that time is the CZ low probability state, it is decided with a 30% probability that the character B image will be maintained, and with a 70% probability that it will be changed to the character A image.
Similarly, if the probability state A at that time is a CZ high probability state, it is decided with a 90% probability that the character B image will be maintained, and with a 10% probability that it will be changed to the character A image.

With the above-mentioned probabilities, it is determined whether the color scheme of the main character's clothing will be maintained or changed during a game in the second CZ low-probability state, so that if the color of the main character's clothing is blue, the probability state A at that time is more likely to be a CZ low-probability state, and if the color of the main character's clothing is yellow, the probability state A at that time is more likely to be a CZ high-probability state.
In other words, during the second CZ low probability state, the color of the main character's clothing indicates whether probability state A is a CZ low probability state or a CZ high probability state.

Next, Figures 22(c) and 22(d) show the probability of maintaining or changing the color scheme of the flame image in a game during the second CZ high probability state.

As shown in Figure 22 (c), in a game during the second CZ high probability state in the normal game state, when a flame A image (e.g., large flame A image 32a in Figure 21) in which the color scheme of the flame image is orange is displayed, if the probability state A at that time is a CZ low probability state, it is decided with a 100% probability that the flame A image will be maintained, and with a 0% probability that it will be changed to a flame B image (e.g., large flame B image 32d in Figure 21) in which the color scheme is blue.
Similarly, if the probability state A at that time is a CZ high probability state, i.e., a CZ overlap high probability state, it is decided with a 0% probability to maintain the flame A image, and with a 100% probability to change to the flame B image.

Also, as shown in Figure 22 (d), in a game during the second CZ high probability state in the normal game state, when the flame B image is displayed and the probability state A at that time is a CZ low probability state, it is decided with a 0% probability that the flame B image will be maintained, and with a 100% probability that it will be changed to the flame A image.
Similarly, if the probability state A at that time is a CZ high probability state, i.e., a CZ overlap high probability state, it is decided with a 100% probability to maintain the flame B image, and with a 0% probability to change to the flame A image.

The above probabilities determine whether the color scheme of the flame image will be maintained or changed during a game in the second CZ high probability state in normal game play, so if the flame image is orange, it is determined that the probability state A at that time is a CZ low probability state, and if the flame image is blue, it is determined that the probability state A at that time is a CZ high probability state.

In other words, during the second CZ high probability state, the color scheme of the flame image will be selected with a different probability than the selection probability of the color scheme of the main character's clothing during the second CZ low probability state, and as a result, the color scheme of the flame image will definitively indicate whether probability state A is a CZ low probability state or a CZ high probability state.
Although not shown in the figure, during the second CZ high probability state, the main character's clothing will always (with a 100% probability) be changed to an image showing red (for example, character C image 30c in Figure 20).

As described above, since the display of the image of the main character and the flame image is controlled by the sub-control device 20, the color scheme of the main character's clothing (yellow) during the second CZ low probability state does not indicate with 100% probability that probability state A is a CZ high probability state, but the color scheme of the flame image (blue) during the second CZ high probability state does indicate with 100% probability that probability state A is a CZ high probability state.
As a result, during the second CZ low probability state, the color of the main character's clothing suggests whether probability state A is a CZ low probability state or a CZ high probability state, whereas during the second CZ high probability state, the color scheme of the flame image definitively indicates whether probability state A is a CZ low probability state or a CZ high probability state.

In other words, the sub-control device 20 is equipped with a state notification control means that can notify that it is controlled to a high probability first gaming state (CZ high probability state) with different probabilities depending on whether it is controlled to a specific first gaming state or not.
Therefore, the notification mode related to the state of probability state A can be changed in various ways depending on the state of probability state B, thereby creating a clear notification mode, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, during the second CZ low probability state, it is indicated whether probability state A is a CZ low probability state or a CZ high probability state, allowing the player to enjoy playing the game while predicting the state of probability state A.
On the other hand, during the second CZ high probability state, the player's sense of expectation increases, and by accurately notifying the state related to the probability state A, it is possible to more effectively increase the player's sense of expectation. In particular, it is possible to significantly increase the player's sense of expectation during the CZ overlap high probability state.
The probability of changing and maintaining the image of the main character and the flame image may be other than those described above as long as the above-mentioned tendency can be formed.
As described above, various effects related to the CZ state are executed in the gaming machine of the second embodiment.

The above describes the second embodiment of the slot machine 1. In the second embodiment, a state change related to probability state B is performed every time a predetermined number of games are executed, but the state change related to probability state B may also be performed based on the drawing of a predetermined role.
In addition, the cycle of transitioning to the second CZ high probability state is repeated from the point of transition to the advantageous zone, but if a CZ state, pseudo bonus state, or AT state occurs, the repetition may start from the point of completion of each game state.

In addition, even if there is an additional game number in the second CZ high probability state, if the CZ state is won before the transition to the second CZ high probability state, the additional game number may be carried over to the game after the CZ state ends, or may be cleared. In addition, if the pseudo bonus state is won during the CZ state, a bonus may be awarded based on the remaining additional game number. For example, a predetermined number of games may be added to the initial number of games in the pseudo bonus state.
In addition, when a pseudo bonus state is won during the second CZ state, a pseudo bonus state with a higher degree of advantage may be generated than when a pseudo bonus state is won during the first CZ state.
The slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is configured as described above.

Third Embodiment
Next, a third embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

In the gaming machine of the third embodiment (slot machine 1), only some of the control related to the progress of the game and some of the presentation content are different from those of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and the rest is the same as the first embodiment.
Therefore, in the third embodiment, only the points that are different from the first embodiment will be described, and the other points are the same as the first embodiment described above, so the description will be omitted.

[Freeze game in the gaming machine of the third embodiment]
First, the freeze game in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 23 to FIG.
In the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, a freeze game can be executed in a predetermined game under the control of the main control device 10.
The freeze game is a game in which the progress of a specified game is temporarily prohibited (stopped) while it is being executed, and is set up so that the player cannot stop reel 4 or end the game itself by operating it.
During the freeze play, it is possible to execute effects related to the results of the lottery for a winning combination or the lottery for a special bonus (pseudo bonus state, AT state).

Therefore, if a freeze play is performed during game play, even after the start lever 3 has been operated to start the game, the stop control of the reels 4 is disabled even if the player operates the stop button 5, and the game is prohibited from progressing during that time.

In addition, the sub-controller 20 receives control information related to freeze game from the main controller 10 and controls the main display 8, the sub-display 17, the speaker 9, and the lamp 11 to execute a freeze effect corresponding to the freeze game.
In particular, in this third embodiment, details of which will be described later, when a freeze effect is executed on the main display 8, it is possible to execute an effect that notifies of a role different from the lottery result for the role at that time.

Also, in the slot machine 1 of this third embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the sub-control unit 20 is capable of executing a winning effect based on the results of a role selection during game execution, and the winning role is notified by executing the winning effect.
In other words, the sub-controller 20 is equipped with a notification control means capable of executing control to execute a predetermined notification based on the lottery result of the lottery means (main controller 10).

First, various state transitions when a freeze game is executed in a predetermined game will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 23 shows the state of reception of input from the stop button 5, the state of rotation of the reel 4, and the transition of the presentation content on the main display 8 when a freeze game is executed in a specified game.
In the third embodiment, a freeze game is executed in some games when a rare combination is won.

As shown in FIG. 23, when the game is started (timing t10) by the player operating the start lever 3 (start operation), the reel 4 starts to rotate (forward rotation).
Furthermore, after a predetermined time (including the wait time) has elapsed since the start operation, the reel 4 that has started to rotate will transition to a steady rotation. Normally, at the point where the reel 4 transitions to a steady rotation, input of the stop button 5 is enabled, making it possible to stop the reel 4.

However, if the result of the lottery at the start of the game is, for example, a strong cherry role, and it is decided to execute a freeze game in the game, as shown in the figure, the input of the stop button 5 is not enabled, the invalid state continues, and the freeze game is executed.
Although details will be described later, the freeze game continues to be executed until a predetermined freeze time has elapsed, at which point the game transitions to the main game (timing t11).

Therefore, from the time when the game starts until the freeze time has elapsed (timing t10 to t11), a freeze game is executed in which the progress of the game through the player's operations is prohibited.
That is, the main control device 10 as a game control means is provided with a freeze game control means capable of executing a freeze game in which the progress of a predetermined game is prohibited for a predetermined period during the execution of the game.

Furthermore, when a strong cherry role is won by playing the game, a winning effect may be executed as shown in the first embodiment. Normally, in this winning effect, an effect is executed to notify the player of a cherry role (or to notify the player of a strong cherry role) in response to the winning of the strong cherry role. However, when a freeze game is executed, a freeze effect is executed on the main display 8 during the freeze game to notify the player of a role other than the strong cherry role (fake notification).
Furthermore, when a freeze game is executed, the freeze effect is performed in the same manner as when a normal winning effect is executed, except that the color of the light inside the stop button 5 is not changed to the color (blue) indicating a valid win, and further, during the freeze game, the rotation pattern of the reel 4 is the same as in a normal game.

Therefore, the player will recognize the freeze effect as a normal winning effect being executed, and will perform a stop operation to try to get the role that was falsely notified during the freeze game. However, since input to the stop button 5 is disabled during the freeze game, even if a stop operation is performed, reel 4 will not stop, and reel 4 will continue to spin.

In addition, Figure 23 shows a case where a watermelon role is announced as a role different from the strong cherry role, and as will be described in detail later, the announcement mode during the freeze performance is selected from among a plurality of announcement modes under the control of the sub-control unit 20.
During the freeze game, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 9, and the lamp 11 is illuminated in a predetermined manner.

Next, when the elapsed time from the start of the freeze game reaches the freeze time, the freeze game ends and the game transitions to the main game (normal game), and at that point (timing t11), input of the stop button 5 is enabled, making it possible to stop the reel 4.
In addition, when this game is started, the watermelon role notification (fake notification) that had been executed up until that point ends, and a winning presentation corresponding to the winning of a strong cherry role is started, and a winning presentation notifying the cherry role (or strong cherry role) is executed on the main display 8.

Therefore, the player can check the role that has been notified during the game and perform the stopping operation to aim for the corresponding role. When each stop button 5 is operated (timing t12), all reels 4 stop (the symbol combination corresponding to the Strong Cherry role stops) and the winning role is determined. If all appropriate stopping operations have been performed to win the winning role, the winning of the winning role (Strong Cherry role) is confirmed.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, when a freeze play is performed in a game in which a winning presentation based on the results of a role selection is executed, a fake notification is executed during the freeze play to notify of a role other than the winning role.
In other words, the sub-controller 20, as an alarm control means, is equipped with a specific alarm control means that, when executing an alarm corresponding to the lottery result in the lottery means (main controller 10) in a game, when a freeze game is executed, can execute a specific alarm (fake alarm) different from the lottery result in the lottery means during the execution of the freeze game.

Therefore, by implementing freeze play and fake notifications during that time, it is possible to make the game more diverse and to increase interest.
Furthermore, a player who believes that a normal game is being played can be made to realize that a freeze game is being played when the stop button 5 is operated, making it possible to execute a highly exciting game that will surprise the player.

It should be noted that the main control unit 10 is configured to execute a freeze game in games in which a rare role is won, but the freeze game may also be executed in all games in which a rare role is won, or the freeze game may be executed with a predetermined probability (e.g., 50%) in games in which a rare role is won.
In addition, the rare combination that triggers the execution of the freeze game may be all or some of the weak watermelon combination, strong watermelon combination, chance combination, weak cherry combination, and strong cherry combination.
In addition, freeze play may be implemented in all or some of the games in which a rare role set as the winning trigger role for a special privilege (CZ state, pseudo bonus state, AT state) is won.

In addition, when a rare role is won, it may be possible to determine whether or not to enter a freeze game depending on whether or not a bonus is awarded. For example, when a strong cherry role is won, if the player wins the lottery to transition to a pseudo bonus state, a freeze game may be executed with a predetermined probability (e.g., 60%), and if the player does not win the lottery to transition to a pseudo bonus state, a freeze game may be executed with a lower probability (e.g., 40%).
In addition, the probability of executing the freeze game may be changed according to the type of rare combination that has been won, or the freeze game may be executed for combinations other than rare combinations.
The notification mode for the watermelon or cherry role may be any mode that allows the player to recognize the winning role, and may be such that a weak watermelon role (or weak cherry role) and a strong watermelon role (or strong cherry role) can be distinguished from each other.

Next, the execution time of the freeze game will be described with reference to FIG.
First, in this third embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, a lottery is held to transition to a pseudo-bonus state based on the winning of a strong cherry role, and if the transition lottery is won, the game state transitions to the pseudo-bonus state.
That is, the main control device 10 is provided with a special game state occurrence determination means capable of determining whether or not to generate a special game state (pseudo bonus state) advantageous to the player based on the lottery result of the lottery means.

In a game in which a strong cherry role is won, in addition to the lottery for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state, a lottery is also held to determine whether or not to execute a freeze game. If the result of this lottery is that a freeze game is executed, the progress of the game will be stopped for a prescribed period of time. However, in the main control device 10 of the third embodiment, the freeze time, which is the prescribed period during which the freeze game is executed, can be changed depending on the result of the lottery for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state at that time.
Therefore, when a freeze game is executed, the duration of the freeze game changes depending on the result of the lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus state at that time.

FIG. 24 shows the probability of selecting the freeze time when it is decided to execute a freeze game in a game in which a strong cherry role is won.
In this third embodiment, the freeze time can be set to either 5 seconds or 10 seconds, and the main control unit 10 selects the freeze time by drawing a predetermined random number when a strong cherry role is won.

As shown in FIG. 24, if the strong cherry role is won but the transition lottery to the pseudo bonus state is not won, a lottery is held to select the freeze time such that the freeze time is set to 5 seconds with an 80% probability and 10 seconds with a 20% probability.
In addition, if the lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus state is won when the strong cherry role is won, a lottery for selecting the freeze time is held so that the freeze time is set to 5 seconds with a 50% probability and to 10 seconds with a 50% probability.

The freeze game will continue for the freeze time determined by the above selection lottery, during which time game progress is prohibited and the freeze effect will be executed.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, the freeze time in a freeze game is set to 5 or 10 seconds, and the freeze time is selected based on the result of the lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus state.
In other words, the main control unit 10, as a freeze game control means, selects the execution time of the freeze game from among a plurality of execution times, and makes it possible to execute the freeze game at the selected execution time, and makes it possible to select the execution time of the freeze game based on the decision result of the special game state occurrence decision means (main control unit 10).

Therefore, it becomes possible to execute a plurality of freeze games with different freeze times, and it becomes possible to execute a more diverse and interesting freeze game.
In addition, the execution time of the freeze game changes depending on whether the transition lottery to the pseudo bonus state is successful, making it possible to execute a highly entertaining game in which the player's expectations change depending on the execution time of the freeze game.
In addition, if the player wins the lottery for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state, the probability that a longer freeze time will be selected increases compared to when the player does not win.
Therefore, if the freeze game continues for a long time, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation regarding the transition to the pseudo bonus state.

The freeze time may be other than the above, and three or more types of freeze times may be provided.
In addition, a freeze game is executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%) in a game in which a strong cherry role is won, but it may also be configured so that a freeze game is executed without fail in a game in which a strong cherry role is won.

In addition, when a strong cherry role is won, if the lottery for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state is not won, a freeze game may be executed with a first probability (e.g., 40%), and if the lottery for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state is won, a freeze game may be executed with a second probability (e.g., 60%) that is higher than the first probability.

In addition, a freeze game may be made possible in a game in which a role other than a strong cherry role is won. For example, a freeze game may be made possible in a game in which a strong watermelon role is won.
In addition, when a freeze game is executed in a game in which a strong watermelon role is won, the freeze time may be determined based on the results of the CZ state transition lottery held when the strong watermelon role is won, as described above.

Next, the notification mode during freeze game will be described with reference to FIG.
As mentioned above, when a freeze game is executed in a specified game, a freeze effect is executed under the control of the sub-control device 20, and a fake notification different from the winning role at that time is made on the main display 8. However, in this third embodiment, when this fake notification is executed, the type of the fake notification can be changed depending on the freeze time at that time.

In other words, the fake notification has multiple notification modes set, and when a freeze game is executed, the fake notification mode can be changed by selecting one of the multiple notification modes and executing it according to the freeze time at that time.

FIG. 25 shows the probability of executing a freeze game based on winning a strong cherry role, and the probability of selecting a notification mode in a freeze game when the freeze time is determined.
In the third embodiment, three types of notification modes during freeze play are set: "Watermelon role,""Chancerole," and "Watermelon role → Chance role." The sub-control device 20 selects the notification mode by drawing a predetermined random number when the freeze time is determined.

In the table, "Watermelon role" indicates the notification of a watermelon role, "Chance role" indicates the notification of a chance role, and "Watermelon role → Chance role" indicates a pattern in which the role notified during freeze play is changed from a watermelon role to a chance role.
That is, in this third embodiment, a notification mode is set in which a watermelon role is first notified during freeze play, and after a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed, the notification target is changed to notify a chance role.

As shown in FIG. 25, when the freeze time of the freeze game is 5 seconds, a selection lottery is held to select the notification mode such that the "watermelon role" is determined with an 80% probability, the "chance role" is determined with a 20% probability, and the "watermelon role → chance role" is determined with a 0% probability.
In addition, when the freeze time of the freeze game is 10 seconds, a selection lottery is performed to select the notification mode such that the "watermelon role" is determined with a 30% probability, the "chance role" is determined with a 60% probability, and the "watermelon role → chance role" is determined with a 10% probability.
The freeze effect is executed according to the notification mode determined by the above-mentioned selection lottery.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, the notification modes for fake notifications during freeze play are "watermelon role,""chancerole," or "watermelon role → chance role," and the notification mode is selected based on the result of the lottery for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state.
In other words, the sub-controller 20, as a specific notification control means, is capable of selecting any one of a plurality of notification modes to execute a specific notification (fake notification), and is capable of selecting the notification mode in the specific notification (fake notification) based on the decision result of the special game state occurrence decision means (main controller 10).

Therefore, the fake notifications can be changed in various ways, making it possible to implement a more diverse and interesting freeze game.
In addition, the fake notification changes depending on whether the transition lottery to the pseudo bonus state is successful or not, making it possible to implement a highly entertaining game in which the player's sense of expectation changes depending on the type of fake notification.

Furthermore, when the freeze time is 10 seconds, the probability of selecting a role other than the "watermelon role"("chancerole" or "watermelon role → chance role") is higher than when the freeze time is 5 seconds.
As mentioned above, when the freeze time is 10 seconds, the probability of winning the lottery to transition to the pseudo bonus state is higher than when the freeze time is 5 seconds, so when the probability of winning the lottery to transition to the pseudo bonus state is high, the probability of selecting something other than the ``watermelon role'' increases.
Therefore, when a role other than the "watermelon role" is selected, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation regarding the transition to the pseudo bonus state.

Furthermore, if the freeze time is 10 seconds, there is a possibility of selecting "watermelon role -> chance role", which would not be selected if the freeze time was 5 seconds.
In other words, the sub-controller 20 as a specific notification control means is capable of selecting a notification mode in a specific notification (fake notification) that switches from a predetermined notification mode to a different notification mode.
Therefore, it is possible to implement highly entertaining effects such as a fake notification changing midway through, and when the "watermelon role → chance role" is selected, it is possible to further increase the player's anticipation of the transition to the pseudo bonus state.

In addition, the fake notification can be anything that allows the player to recognize the target role, and can display an item image corresponding to each role, an image with a color scheme corresponding to each role, text information corresponding to each role, etc.
In addition, the selection of fake notifications is controlled based on the freeze time during freeze play, but the selection of fake notifications may also be controlled based on whether or not a pseudo bonus state has been won.
Furthermore, the selection probability of each fake notification may be other than the above.

In addition, the selection control of fake alerts is performed by the sub-control unit 20, but the selection control may be performed by the main control unit 10, and the fake alert may be executed by transmitting control information specifying the selection result to the sub-control unit 20.
As described above, the freeze game is executed in the gaming machine of the third embodiment.

[Images of effects during freeze play in the gaming machine of the third embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, a description will be given of an effect image during a freeze game in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment.
In the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, a freeze effect can be executed during a freeze game by the control of the sub-controller 20 based on the control information received from the main controller 10 .

For example, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the main display device 8 to execute a freeze effect.
In addition, the control information transmitted from the main control unit 10 includes at least information instructing the execution of a freeze game, information specifying the freeze time, and information specifying the winning role at that time, and may be any information that enables the sub-control unit 20 to execute a freeze effect.

Figure 26 shows the freeze effect when a strong cherry role is won and a freeze game is executed, and shows the performance image on the main display 8 when the freeze time is determined to be 5 seconds (see Figure 24) and the fake notification type is determined to be the "watermelon role" (see Figure 25).
Therefore, if a fake notification mode other than the "watermelon role" is selected, a fake notification different from the one shown in the figure will be performed.

First, as shown in Figure 26 (a), when a game in which a freeze game is executed is started, the progress of the game is prohibited and a freeze effect is started, and a fake notification image 40a consisting of text information "Aim for the watermelon!" corresponding to the watermelon role is displayed as a fake notification in the main part of the screen of the main display 8.
In other words, since the result of the lottery for the role in this game is a strong cherry role, in a normal game, a winning effect is executed to notify the player of a strong cherry role (or a cherry role), but when a freeze effect is executed, a fake notification is made corresponding to a watermelon role (weak watermelon role or strong watermelon role) different from the strong cherry role.

However, since the mode of notification of the role during the fake notification is almost the same as the mode of notification of the role during the winning effect when a watermelon role (weak watermelon role or strong watermelon role) is won in a normal game, it is difficult for a player to recognize that a freeze effect is being performed at the start of the game, and so the player will perform the stopping operation of reel 4 aiming for the watermelon role, as in a normal game.
The only difference between the freeze play and the winning effect is that the stop button 5 emits an inactive notification light during the freeze play.

However, during this period, progress of the game is prohibited and input of the stop button 5 is invalid, so even if an operation to stop the reel 4 is performed in an attempt to get the watermelon role, the reel 4 will not stop but will continue to spin.
Therefore, when the reel 4 is stopped, the player realizes that a freeze game is being executed.

The period during which the fake notification is made may be any period from when the game is started until the freeze game is being executed, and the fake notification may be made from the time the start operation is performed until the freeze game ends (timing t10 to t11 in Figure 23), or from the time the wait time has elapsed (when reel 4 starts to rotate) until the freeze game ends.
In addition, as the fake notification image 40a, a presentation image corresponding to the watermelon role is displayed, but presentation images corresponding to a weak watermelon role and a strong watermelon role may be provided and either one may be selectively displayed.
Also, although not shown in the figure, during the freeze effect, in addition to the fake notification image 40a, a predetermined decorative image will be displayed.

Then, as shown in Figure 26 (b), when the freeze time (5 seconds) in the freeze game has elapsed, the freeze game ends and the freeze effect (fake notification) ends, and the winning effect is executed when the main game begins, and notification of the winning role corresponding to the winning role in the game begins.
In Figure 26 (b), since this is a game in which a strong cherry role has been won, a winning role notification image 40b consisting of text information corresponding to the strong cherry role, "Aim for the cherry!", is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8 to notify of the winning role.
Although an effect image corresponding to the cherry role is displayed as the winning role notification image 40b, effect images corresponding to a weak cherry role and a strong cherry role may be provided, and one of them may be selectively displayed depending on the winning role.

In addition, when switching from freeze play to main play, as shown in the figure, the winning combination notification image 40b starts to be displayed, and a video is displayed in which the fake notification image 40a that had been displayed up until that point is pushed off the screen, thereby notifying the end of the freeze play.

Then, by transitioning to the main game, input of the stop button 5 is enabled, allowing the game to proceed, and the player who sees the winning combination notification image 40b will recognize the winning combination in that game and perform the stopping operation of the reel 4 in order to achieve the winning combination.

Although not shown in the figure, when "watermelon role → chance role" is selected as the notification mode of the fake notification, after a predetermined time (5 seconds) has elapsed since the fake notification image 40a is displayed, it will be switched to a fake notification image corresponding to the chance role, and after another predetermined time (5 seconds) has elapsed, it will be switched to a winning role notification image 40b in the same manner as above.
In this case, when the fake notification image 40a is switched to the fake notification image corresponding to the chance role, the same presentation as when transitioning to the main game is performed, so that when the fake notification image corresponding to the chance role is displayed, the player will recognize that he or she has again won the chance role in the game and will perform the stopping operation of reel 4.

As described above, when a freeze game is executed in a specified game, a freeze effect is executed on the main display 8, and a fake notification (specific notification) that is different from the lottery result of the role in that game is executed.
Therefore, when a game involving a transition in the game state is executed, an unexpected presentation can be implemented, such as a change in the announced role, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, during freeze play, progress in the game is prohibited, so cancellation of the effects is not possible, making it possible to take sufficient time to execute the effects.
Furthermore, a player performing a stopping operation in the same manner as in a normal game will become aware that a freeze game is being played at that point when the stopping operation is invalidated, making it possible to play a novel and exciting game that will give the player a certain amount of surprise.

Although the freeze effect is displayed on the main display 8, it may be displayed on the sub-display 17.
In addition, during freeze play, when a fake notification is being made on the main display 8, an image of "Aim for the Cherry!" may be displayed on the sub-display 17, thereby executing a presentation (standby presentation) that notifies in advance that there is a possibility that the notification mode will change.
In this case, it is preferable to display an image similar to the above (fake display) on the sub-display 17 during part of a normal game that is not a freeze game, and in this way it is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation even during a normal game.
As described above, the effect image during freeze play is displayed in the gaming machine of the third embodiment.

[Modification 1 of the third embodiment]
Next, a first modified example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In variant example 1 of the third embodiment, only a part of the freeze effects during freeze play differs from that of the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment described above, and the rest is the same as that of the slot machine 1 described above, so only the differences will be explained.

In the third embodiment described above, if the player operates the disabled stop button 5 during freeze play, the freeze effect (fake notification) is not changed. However, in variant 1 of this third embodiment, the freeze effect (fake notification) is changed based on the operation of the stop button 5 during freeze play.

As described above, Figure 27 shows the freeze effect when a strong cherry role is won and a freeze game is executed, and shows the performance image on the main display 8 when the freeze time is determined to be 5 seconds and the fake notification type is determined to be the ``watermelon role.''
Therefore, if a fake notification mode other than the "watermelon role" is selected, a fake notification different from the one shown in the figure will be performed.

First, as shown in FIG. 27(a), when a game in which a freeze play is performed is started, as described above, the progress of the game is prohibited and the freeze effect is started, and a fake notification image 40a consisting of text information "Aim for the watermelon!" corresponding to the watermelon role is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8 as a fake notification, and a role different from the winning role is notified.

Then, if the player operates the stop button 5 aiming for the watermelon role before a predetermined time (e.g., 4 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the freeze game, the fake notification image 40a is erased, and a conversion image 40c consisting of the text information "Conversion!" is displayed instead in the main part of the screen of the main display 8, to notify in advance that the notification mode will be changed, as shown in Figure 27(b).
In other words, the main control unit 10 accepts input from the stop button 5, invalidates it with respect to stopping the reel 4 but validates it with respect to performance control, and transmits control information identifying that input to the sub-control unit 20, thereby displaying the converted image 40c.

By displaying this conversion image 40c, the player who operated the stop button 5 realizes that the current state is that of frozen play, and recognizes that the fake notification image 40a that had been displayed up until that point will then be converted into an image notifying the winning role.
This converted image 40c continues to be displayed until the freeze game ends.

Then, when the freeze game ends and the main game starts, as shown in FIG. 27(c), the conversion image 40c is erased and a winning role notification image 40b consisting of text information "Aim for Cherry!" corresponding to the strong cherry role is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8 to notify of a winning role.

On the other hand, when the fake notification image 40a is displayed and the player operates the stop button 5 after a predetermined time (e.g., 4 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the freeze game (start of the game), the conversion image 40c will not be displayed, and after the freeze time has elapsed, the image will be switched from the fake notification image 40a to the winning role notification image 40b (Figure 27 (a) → (c)).
Thereafter, the effects during the game will be carried out in the same manner as described above.

In other words, if the stop button 5 is operated within a predetermined time (e.g., 4 seconds) from the start of the freeze game (start of the game), the conversion image 40c will be displayed, but if the stop button 5 is operated during the period (1 second) from the elapse of the predetermined time (e.g., 4 seconds) until the freeze time (e.g., 5 seconds) is reached, the conversion image 40c will not be displayed.

This is to prevent the conversion image 40c from being displayed when the stop button 5 is operated just before the end of a freeze game, as this would cause the conversion image 40c to be displayed for just an instant before immediately switching to the winning combination announcement image 40b, resulting in an effect that is difficult for the player to see.
Therefore, even if the stop button 5 is operated during the period (1 second) from when a predetermined time (e.g., 4 seconds) has elapsed until the freeze time (e.g., 5 seconds) is reached, the conversion image 40c will not be displayed, and the fake notification image 40a will remain displayed, and if the freeze time has then elapsed, the winning role notification image 40b will automatically be switched to and displayed.

As described above, in variant example 1 of the third embodiment, when the player operates the stop button 5 during freeze play, the fake notification is terminated and a conversion image 40c is displayed to notify in advance that the notification mode will be changed.
In other words, the sub-controller 20 as a specific notification control means makes it possible to terminate a specific notification (fake notification) based on the operation of the operating means (stop button 5).

Therefore, a player who is unaware that he or she is in freeze mode will become aware of this at the time he or she operates the stop button 5, making it possible to realize an element of surprise in the game.
Furthermore, when the stop button 5 is operated, a conversion image 40c is displayed to notify in advance that the notification mode will be changed, making it possible for the player to more clearly recognize that the image that had been displayed up until that point was not an indication of the actual winning combination, and making it possible for a player who feels something is wrong because reel 4 has not stopped to reliably recognize that the state at that time is that of frozen play.

In addition, even if the player does not operate the stop button 5 during freeze play, the winning role notification image 40b will automatically be displayed when the freeze play ends, so even if the player does not operate the stop button 5, it is possible to end the fake notification and notify the winning role without any problems.

Furthermore, if the player operates the stop button 5 after a predetermined time (e.g., 4 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the freeze game (start of the game), the conversion image 40c will not be displayed, and the fake notification image 40a will remain displayed.In other words, the sub-control device 20, which serves as a specific notification control means, can prohibit the end of the specific notification (fake notification) if the operating means (stop button 5) is operated when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the game.

This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the stop button 5 is operated just before the end of a freeze game, causing the conversion image 40c to be displayed for just an instant and then immediately switched to the winning combination announcement image 40b, creating an effect that is difficult for the player to see.

Although not shown in the figures, when the notification mode is changed during freeze play (when "Watermelon role → Chance role" in Figure 25 is selected), the image notifying the watermelon role is changed to an image notifying the chance role when the player first operates the stop button 5 during freeze play, and the image notifying the chance role is changed to the conversion image 40c when the player next operates the stop button 5.
As described above, the slot machine 1 according to the first modified example of the third embodiment is realized.

[Modification 2 of the third embodiment]
Next, a second modified example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In variant example 2 of the third embodiment, only a part of the freeze effects during freeze play differs from that of the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment described above, and the rest is the same as that of the slot machine 1 described above, so only the differences will be explained.

In the third embodiment described above, the notification mode was automatically switched during the freeze effect during freeze play, but in variant 2 of this third embodiment, the notification mode is switched based on the player's operation by executing a button effect during the freeze effect.

The button presentation as an operation presentation is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, where first, an operation image consisting of an image imitating an operation button that prompts the user to operate the presentation button 2d (or upper presentation button 2f) as a presentation operation means, or text information instructing the operation (e.g., "PUSH"), is displayed on the main display 8 (or sub-display 17), and then, when the indicated presentation button 2d (or upper presentation button 2f) is operated, a predetermined image is displayed on the main display 8 (or sub-display 17).
In other words, various effect images during the freeze effect are not displayed in response to the passage of time, but are instead displayed in response to an operation by the player.

As described above, Figure 28 shows the freeze effect when a strong cherry role is won and a freeze game is executed, and shows the performance image on the main display 8 when the freeze time is determined to be 5 seconds and the fake notification type is determined to be the ``watermelon role.''
Therefore, if a fake notification mode other than the "watermelon role" is selected, a fake notification different from the one shown in the figure will be performed.

First, as shown in FIG. 28(a), when a game in which a freeze game is executed is started, the progress of the game is prohibited and an operation image 40d imitating the effect button 2d, including the text information of "PUSH" instructing an operation, is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8, and the button effect is executed.
By displaying this operation image 40d, the effect button 2d is activated (the internal LED lights up in a color indicating an activated state), and the player is prompted to operate the effect button 2d.

When the player operates the effect button 2d, as shown in FIG. 28(b), the operation image 40d is erased, and instead, a fake notification image 40a consisting of text information "Aim for the watermelon!" corresponding to the watermelon role is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8 as a fake notification, and a role different from the winning role is notified.

When the freeze time in the freeze game has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 27(c), the fake notification image 40a is erased, and the operation image 40d is displayed again in the main part of the screen of the main display 8, and the second button performance is executed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 2d again, as shown in Figure 28 (d), the conversion image 40c is erased and a winning role notification image 40b consisting of text information such as "Aim for Cherry!" corresponding to the strong cherry role is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8 as an indication of a winning role.
Thereafter, the effects during the game will be carried out in the same manner as described above.

If the player does not operate the effect button 2d when the first button effect is executed, the fake notification image 40a and winning role notification image 40b will not be displayed until the end of the game, and if the effect button 2d is operated when the first button effect is executed and the player does not operate the effect button 2d during the second button effect, the fake notification image 40a will remain displayed and the winning role notification image 40b will not be displayed until the end of the game.

As described above, in variant example 2 of the third embodiment, a button effect is executed during freeze play, and the fake notification image 40a is displayed when the player operates the effect button 2d.
In other words, the sub-control device 20 as a specific notification control means makes it possible to start a specific notification (fake notification) based on the operation of a performance operation means (e.g., the performance button 2d).
Therefore, the fake notification can be executed by the player's own operation, which can increase the entertainment value of the freeze effect.

Furthermore, during freeze play, the button effect is executed twice, and when the player operates the effect button 2d the second time, the winning combination announcement image 40b is displayed.
Therefore, the player has the opportunity to operate the effect button 2d multiple times, and various effect images can be changed by the player's own operation, making it possible to further increase the interest of the freeze effect.

Although not shown in the figures, when the notification mode is changed during freeze game (when "Watermelon role → Chance role" in Figure 25 is selected), a button effect is executed at the start of freeze game, and when the player first operates the effect button 2d, an image notifying the watermelon role is displayed, and when a predetermined time (5 seconds) has passed, a second button effect is executed, and when the player operates the effect button 2d for the second time, an image notifying the chance role is displayed, and when a further predetermined time (5 seconds) has passed, a third button effect is executed, and when the player operates the effect button 2d for the third time, the winning role notification image 40b is displayed.
Also, during the freeze effect, a button effect may be executed that targets the operation of the upper effect button 2f.
As described above, the slot machine 1 according to the second modified example of the third embodiment is realized.

[Modification 3 of the third embodiment]
Next, a third modified example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.
In variant example 3 of the third embodiment, the control of the reels during freeze play differs from that of the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment described above, but otherwise is similar to the slot machine 1 described above, so only the differences will be explained.

In the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment described above, when a freeze game is executed, even if the stop button 5 is operated, the reel 4 does not stop and continues to spin. However, in the third modified example of the third embodiment, it is possible to execute a pseudo game in which the reel 4 can be pseudo-stopped during the freeze game.

A pseudo game refers to an execution mode during a game in which multiple game results (pseudo game results) are derived in a single game, and the main control device 10 is capable of executing a pseudo game in a specified game.
Specifically, in a normal game, the main control device 10 rotates the reel 4 by operating the start lever 3, and derives the result of one game by stopping the rotating reel 4 by operating the stop button 5, but in a game in which a simulated game is executed, the reel 4 is pseudo-stopped before the final game result is derived, as in a normal game, so that a pseudo game result (pseudo game result) can be derived even in the middle of the game.
In other words, when a pseudo game is executed, multiple game results (including pseudo game results) are derived by consuming the medals (bet input) required to execute one game.

The pseudo games include operational pseudo games that require player operation and notification pseudo games that do not require player operation.
As described above, the notification pseudo game is, for example, a pseudo game that is executed during the first game of the pseudo bonus state, in which reel 4 automatically comes to a pseudo-stop, and is a pseudo game that notifies the start of the pseudo bonus state, etc.

On the other hand, the pseudo game is executed by first operating the start lever 3 to spin the reels 4, and then operating the stop button 5 during the game to pseudo-stop (temporarily stop) the spinning reels 4 and derive a pseudo game result. After the pseudo game result has been derived, the reels 4 are respun by operating the start lever 3 again, and the game is executed in the same way as a regular game.

In addition, in the simulated operation game, it is also possible to derive multiple simulated game results by causing the reel 4 to stop simulatedly for each multiple operation by the player during the game.
After the pseudo-game operation is completed, the player operates the final stop button 5 in the same manner as in a normal game to stop the spinning reel 4 (main stop) and derive the final game result.

Therefore, the period from the initial operation of the start lever 3 to the actual stop of the reel 4 is counted as one game, and by performing pseudo-stops of the reel 4 during that time, multiple game results are derived in one game (setting the number of bets for one game).
However, even if a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination is stopped as a result of the simulated game (a pseudo winning combination), no medals will be paid out as in a normal game.

In the third variant of the third embodiment, a pseudo-operation game can be executed during a freeze game, and the reel 4 can be pseudo-stopped once or twice based on the player's operation of the stop button 5 during the freeze game.

In other words, the main control device 10 as a game control means comprises a first game control means capable of executing a first game (main game) in which a pattern combination formed by a plurality of reels (reels 4a to 4c) is derived based on the end of the game, and a second game control means capable of executing a second game (pseudo-operation game) in which, during freeze play, a pattern combination formed by a plurality of reels is derived in addition to the pattern combination derived in the first game.
Therefore, during freeze play, game progress is prohibited, but input of the stop button 5 for pseudo-stopping the reel 4 is valid, and while game progress is prohibited, a pseudo-game operation involving pseudo-stopping of the reel 4 by operating the stop button 5 is executed.

Furthermore, in the third modified example of the third embodiment, when the execution of a freeze game is decided in the main control device 10, the number of times the operation pseudo game is to be executed and the freeze time during the freeze game are decided.
Specifically, when a strong cherry role is won and a freeze game is to be executed, if the pseudo bonus state is won, there is a 40% chance that the pseudo operation game will be executed once and the freeze time will be set to 10 seconds, and there is a 60% chance that the pseudo operation game will be executed twice and the freeze time will be set to 20 seconds; and when a strong cherry role is won and a freeze game is to be executed, if the pseudo bonus state is not won, there is a 60% chance that the pseudo operation game will be executed once and the freeze time will be set to 10 seconds, and there is a 40% chance that the pseudo operation game will be executed twice and the freeze time will be set to 20 seconds.
Therefore, the more times the pseudo game operation is performed, the higher the probability of winning the pseudo bonus state.

In addition, in the third variant of the third embodiment, unlike the third embodiment described above, the main control device 10 executes selection control of the notification mode in the fake notification.
The main control unit 10 then transmits control information specifying the result of the selection control of the notification mode in the fake notification to the sub-control unit 20, thereby executing the fake notification on the main display 8.

In addition, when the main control device 10 decides to execute the operation pseudo game once, it will determine either the "watermelon role" or the "chance role" as the notification mode in the fake notification.
At this time, if the pseudo bonus state is won, it is preferable to increase the probability of selecting the "chance role" compared to when the pseudo bonus state is not won.
Furthermore, although details will be described later, if it is decided to execute the pseudo-operation game twice, one of the following will be determined: "Watermelon role → Watermelon role", "Watermelon role → Chance role", "Chance role → Watermelon role", or "Chance role → Chance role".

Then, the main control device 10 performs stopping control of the reel 4 in such a way that a pseudo stop result in the pseudo operation game can be derived in response to the determined notification mode of the fake notification.
For example, as shown in the figure, when the “watermelon role” is determined as the fake notification, stop control is performed that can pseudo-stop the pattern combination corresponding to the watermelon role based on the operation of the stop button 5 by the player during the pseudo-play.
In addition, the pattern combination at this time may be a weak watermelon role or a strong watermelon role, and either a weak watermelon role or a strong watermelon role may be selectively determined based on whether the pseudo bonus state is won.

First, various state transitions that occur when a pseudo operation is executed once during a freeze game in a predetermined game will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 29 shows the state of accepting input from the stop button 5, the rotation state of the reel 4, and the transition of the presentation content on the main display 8 when a pseudo-operation game is executed once during freeze play in a specified game.
In addition, in the third modified example of the third embodiment, as described above, a freeze game is executed in some games when a rare combination is won.
FIG. 29 shows a case where a strong cherry role is won and a freeze game is executed, and the fake notification mode is determined to be a "watermelon role."

As shown in FIG. 29, when the game is started (timing t13) by the player operating the start lever 3 (start operation), the reel 4 starts to rotate (forward rotation).
At this time, if the execution of a freeze game is decided due to the winning of a strong cherry role, a freeze game will be executed in which the progress of the game is prohibited from the start of the game until the freeze time has elapsed.

In the third modified example of the third embodiment, a pseudo game as a second game is executed during this freeze game, and the reel 4 can be pseudo-stopped.
However, although the operation of the stop button 5 is effective for pseudo-stopping the reel 4, it is ineffective for actual stopping of the reel 4, and the progress of the game remains prohibited.

In addition, when a freeze game is executed, a freeze effect is executed on the main display 8 during the freeze game to notify a role other than the strong cherry role (fake notification), as described above, and the watermelon role is notified.

Therefore, as shown in the figure, during pseudo-operation play (freeze play), a watermelon role is announced as a fake announcement, and when the player confirms the announcement and performs an operation aimed at the pattern corresponding to the watermelon role (timing t14), the pattern combination corresponding to the watermelon role (weak watermelon role or strong watermelon role) is pseudo-stopped.
In addition, the fake watermelon role notification ends with the pseudo-stop of reel 4.

It should be noted that even during the pseudo-operation game, normal reel 4 reel-in stop control is performed, and if the stop operation is not performed at the appropriate timing, a predetermined missed symbol combination will be pseudo-stopped. However, during the pseudo-operation game, the reel-in stop control may be ignored and a symbol combination corresponding to a watermelon role (weak watermelon role or strong watermelon role) may always be pseudo-stopped.
In addition, the pseudo-stopped reels 4 may be moved up and down at a predetermined cycle within a range in which the pseudo-stopped symbols do not cross the pay line.
Furthermore, if the player does not operate the stop button 5 during the pseudo-operation game, the freeze game will end and the game will transition to the main game without the pseudo-stop of the reel 4 being performed.

Then, after the reel 4 has come to a pseudo stop, when the player operates the start lever 3 (timing t15), the reel 4 starts to rotate again, and the main game as the first game is started.
However, even if the rotation of the reel 4 is resumed by operating the start lever 3, the stop button 5 will not be activated until the freeze game ends, and once the freeze time in the freeze game has elapsed, the operation of the stop button 5 will be activated and the game will begin.
In addition, the stop button 5 may be activated when the rotation of the reel 4 is resumed by operating the start lever 3.

Then, based on the player's operation of the stop button 5 during the game, the reel 4 stops (main stop) (timing t16), and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination stops.

Although the freeze game is controlled by time management so that it ends when the freeze time has elapsed, the freeze game may not end until the player operates the stop button 5 during the simulated operation game to pseudo-stop each reel 4.
Therefore, in this case, the freeze game ends and the game shifts to the main game based on the pseudo game result being derived by operating the stop button 5 during the pseudo game.

Next, various state transitions when a pseudo operation is executed twice during a freeze game in a predetermined game will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 30 shows the state of accepting input from the stop button 5, the rotation state of the reel 4, and the transition of the presentation content on the main display 8 when a pseudo-operation game is executed twice during freeze play in a specified game.

Also, FIG. 30 shows a case where a strong cherry role is won and a freeze game is executed, and the fake notification mode is determined to be "watermelon role -> chance role."
In other words, the main control device 10 decides to execute the pseudo operation game twice, and the notification pattern for the fake notification is that the fake notification for the first pseudo operation game is the "watermelon role," and the fake notification for the second pseudo operation game is the "chance role."

As shown in FIG. 30, when the game is started (timing t17) by the player operating the start lever 3 (start operation), the reel 4 starts to rotate (forward rotation).
At this time, if the execution of a freeze game is decided due to the winning of a strong cherry role, a freeze game will be executed in which the progress of the game is prohibited from the start of the game until the freeze time has elapsed.

In the third modified example of the third embodiment, a first pseudo operation game is executed as a second game during this freeze game, and the reel 4 can be pseudo-stopped.
However, although the operation of the stop button 5 is effective for pseudo-stopping the reel 4, it is ineffective for actual stopping of the reel 4, and the progress of the game remains prohibited.

In addition, when "watermelon role → chance role" is determined as the fake notification, stop control is performed that can pseudo-stop the pattern combination corresponding to the watermelon role based on the operation of the stop button 5 by the player during the first pseudo-play.
In addition, when the first pseudo-operation game is executed, a freeze effect is executed on the main display 8 to notify (fake notify) a role other than the strong cherry role, and the watermelon role is notified.

Therefore, during the first pseudo-operation game (freeze game), a watermelon role is announced as a fake announcement, and when the player confirms the announcement and performs an operation aiming at the symbol corresponding to the watermelon role (timing t18), the symbol combination corresponding to the watermelon role (weak watermelon role or strong watermelon role) is pseudo-stopped.
In addition, the fake watermelon role notification ends with the pseudo-stop of reel 4.

Then, after the first pseudo-stop of the reel 4 has been performed, when the player operates the start lever 3 (timing t19), the rotation of the reel 4 starts again, and a second pseudo-play as the second game is executed.
The time when the reel 4 starts to rotate may be when the start lever 3 is operated, or may be when the start lever 3 is operated and a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the game.

Then, when a "chance role" is determined as the fake notification in the second operation pseudo game, stop control is performed that can pseudo-stop the pattern combination corresponding to the chance role based on the operation of the stop button 5 by the player.
In addition, when the second pseudo-play is executed, a freeze effect is executed on the main display 8 to notify (fake notify) a role other than the strong cherry role, and a chance role is notified.

Therefore, during the second pseudo-operation game (freeze game), a notification of a chance role is made as a fake notification, and when the player confirms the notification and performs an operation aimed at the symbol corresponding to the chance role (timing t20), the symbol combination corresponding to the chance role is pseudo-stopped.
In addition, the fake notification of the chance role ends with the pseudo-stop of reel 4.

Then, after the second pseudo-stop of the reel 4 has been performed, when the player operates the start lever 3 (timing t21), the rotation of the reel 4 begins again and the main game as the first game is started.
However, even if the rotation of the reel 4 is resumed by operating the start lever 3, the stop button 5 will not be activated until the freeze game ends, and once the freeze time in the freeze game has elapsed, the operation of the stop button 5 will be activated and the game will begin.
In addition, the stop button 5 may be activated when the rotation of the reel 4 is resumed by operating the start lever 3.

Then, based on the operation of the stop button 5 by the player during the game, the reels 4 stop (main stop) (timing t22), and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination stops.
In addition, a valid operation time is preset for the first pseudo operation game, and if the player does not operate the stop button 5 during the valid operation time in the first pseudo operation game, the game will automatically move to the second pseudo operation game (the fake notification will also change). In addition, if the player does not operate the stop button 5 during the second pseudo operation game, the game will automatically move to the main game when the freeze game ends (the fake notification will also end).

As described above, in variant example 3 of the third embodiment, a pseudo-operation game is executed during freeze play, and the stopping control of reel 4 is performed so that the pattern combination corresponding to the role that has been faked during the freeze play can be pseudo-stopped.
That is, the main control device 10 as the second game control means is capable of deriving on the reel 4 a symbol combination corresponding to a specific notification (fake notification).

Therefore, not only is a winning combination different from the winning combination announced, but a symbol combination corresponding to a fake announcement is also derived on reel 4, thereby increasing the player's sense of expectation and making the game more entertaining.
In addition, since the reel 4 is pseudo-stopped by the player's own operation, a more realistic game can be played during the freeze game, which can further increase the player's sense of expectation.

Furthermore, when a plurality of pseudo operation games are executed during a freeze game, the pseudo operation games are executed a plurality of times in one game.
That is, the main control device 10 as the second game control means makes it possible to execute the second game (pseudo operation game) multiple times in one game.
Therefore, a player can enjoy multiple games in one game, which can greatly increase the player's sense of expectation and the entertainment value of the game.

In addition, the pseudo operation game may be executed three or more times during the freeze game.
In addition, the freeze game is controlled by time management so that it ends when the freeze time has elapsed, but the freeze game may not end until the player operates the stop button 5 during the simulated operation game to pseudo-stop each reel 4 twice.
Therefore, in this case, the freeze game ends and a transition to the main game occurs based on two pseudo game results being derived by operating the stop button 5 during the pseudo game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the probability of selecting the notification mode of the fake notification in each pseudo operation game when the pseudo operation game is executed twice during a freeze game will be described.
In variant example 3 of the third embodiment, as described above, when it is decided to execute the pseudo operation game twice during freeze play, the notification mode in the fake notification will be determined by the control of the main control device 10 to be one of "watermelon role → watermelon role", "watermelon role → chance role", "chance role → watermelon role", or "chance role → chance role".

Then, for example, when "watermelon role → chance role" is determined, in the first pseudo-operation game, a fake notification of the watermelon role is executed on the main display 8, and stop control is performed which can pseudo-stop the pattern combination corresponding to the watermelon role (weak watermelon role or strong watermelon role) on the reel 4, and in the second pseudo-operation game, a fake notification of the chance role is executed on the main display 8, and stop control is performed which can pseudo-stop the pattern combination corresponding to the chance role on the reel 4.
In addition, "Watermelon role → Watermelon role" and "Chance role → Chance role" indicate that a fake notification and pseudo stop control of reel 4 are performed for the same role in the first and second pseudo operation games.

FIG. 31 shows the selection probability of the notification mode in each freeze game when it is decided to execute the operation pseudo game twice during the freeze game based on winning the strong cherry role.
In addition, in variant example 3 of the third embodiment, the notification mode for each freeze game is determined by the main control unit 10, and the main control unit 10 selects the notification mode by drawing a predetermined random number when the freeze game is determined.

As shown in FIG. 31, if the pseudo bonus state is not won, a selection lottery is held to select the notification mode in which "watermelon role → watermelon role" is determined with a 70% probability, "watermelon role → chance role" is determined with a 20% probability, "chance role → watermelon role" is determined with a 10% probability, and "chance role → chance role" is determined with a 0% probability.
In addition, if the pseudo bonus state is won, a selection lottery is held to select the notification mode in which "watermelon role → watermelon role" is determined with a 40% probability, "watermelon role → chance role" is determined with a 30% probability, "chance role → watermelon role" is determined with a 20% probability, and "chance role → chance role" is determined with a 10% probability.
The freeze effect in each operation pseudo game is executed according to the notification mode determined by the above-mentioned selection lottery.

As described above, in variant example 3 of the third embodiment, when the pseudo operation game is executed twice during freeze play, the notification modes for the fake notification in each pseudo operation game are "watermelon role → watermelon role", "watermelon role → chance role", "chance role → watermelon role", and "chance role → chance role", and the notification mode is selected based on the result of the transition lottery to the pseudo bonus state.
Therefore, the target roles for the pseudo stop are changed in various ways, making it possible to implement a more diverse and interesting freeze game.

In addition, the notification mode in the fake notification in each pseudo game operation changes depending on whether or not the pseudo bonus state is won, so it is possible to change the player's expectations by the fake notification and the pseudo stopping pattern combination.
In particular, since "Chance Role → Chance Role" is not selected when the pseudo bonus state is not won, when this pattern is selected, the pseudo bonus state will always be entered, which can greatly increase the player's sense of expectation.

The probability of selecting each pattern may be other than those mentioned above, and the target role for the fake notification may be other than those mentioned above.

The above describes the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, but freeze play may be performed not only during the normal game state, but also during the pseudo bonus state and the AT state. During the pseudo bonus state, it may be performed depending on whether or not a lottery for transitioning to the AT state has been drawn, and during the AT state, it may be performed depending on whether or not an additional lottery has been drawn.

In addition, the number of times that the pseudo operation game is executed during the freeze game may be three or more.
In addition, freeze play may be prohibited during the ending period before the limiter is reached.
In addition, when the notification mode during the freeze game (the symbol combination that is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo operation game) and the notification mode during the main game match, the pseudo bonus state may be confirmed as a winning. In other words, it may be possible to enjoy whether the patterns of the two games match.
In addition, when the pseudo bonus state is won, a special symbol combination (such as 7 symbols) may be pseudo-stopped by a pseudo game operation.
In addition, although a pseudo operation game is executed during a freeze game, a pseudo notification game in which the reel 4 stops without any operation by the player may be executed.
The slot machine 1 of the third embodiment is configured as described above.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, a fourth embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

In the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment (slot machine 1), only some of the control and presentation content related to the CZ state differs from that of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and the rest is the same as that of the first embodiment.
Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, only the points that are different from the first embodiment will be described, and the other points are the same as the first embodiment described above, so the description will be omitted.

[CZ state in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment]
First, with reference to Figures 32 and 33, the CZ state in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment will be explained.
In the slot machine 1 of this fourth embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the main control unit 10 performs a lottery process for transitioning to the CZ state based on the winning of a specified rare role (e.g., a strong cherry role) in the normal gaming state, and transitions the gaming state to the CZ state with a specified probability (e.g., 10%).

When the gaming state transitions to the CZ state, the lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus state is executed in a more advantageous manner for the player than during the normal gaming state.
In other words, the main control unit 10 is equipped with a specific game state control means that can control the game state to a specific game state (CZ state) in which the probability of a special right (right to transition to a pseudo bonus state) being granted by the special game state right granting means (main control unit 10) is increased based on the establishment of predetermined conditions.
In addition, various effects are executed as described above before the transition to the CZ state.

In the fourth embodiment, the main control device 10 provides a special replay role as a role to be selected by lottery in the game.
In other words, the main control unit 10, which serves as a lottery means capable of executing lotteries related to the awarding of benefits, such as lotteries for roles and lotteries for transitioning to a pseudo bonus state (or a CZ state or an AT state), also executes lotteries for special replay roles based on the execution of the game.
The special replay role is a role that is set as a type of replay role, similar to the chance role, and if the role is won, the right to a replay is granted.

In addition, in a game in which a special replay role is won, if the right reel 4c is stopped first (if reel 4 is stopped by a special operation such as a so-called reverse push or irregular push), the "7-7-7" symbol combination (special symbol combination) will stop on the active line, and if any other reel 4 is stopped first, reel 4 stopping control is performed so that the "replay-replay-replay" symbol combination stops on the active line, just as when a normal replay role is won.

In other words, the main control unit 10 is equipped with a game result derivation means which makes it possible to derive a special result (the pattern combination of "7-7-7" (special pattern combination)) as the result of a game when a special operation (reverse push) is performed by the player in a game in which the lottery result for the role is the first lottery result (winning a special replay role).
Therefore, if the game is played so that the left reel 4a is stopped first, even if a special replay combination is achieved, the player will not notice this.
In addition, it is preferable to set the probability of winning the special replay role to a relatively low probability (for example, 10%).

In addition, in this fourth embodiment, the stopping control of reel 4 when a normal replay role other than the special replay role and chance role is won is also different from the first embodiment described above. When the right reel 4c is stopped first (when a special operation is performed), the symbol combination "Replay 7 7" stops on the active line, and when any other reel 4 is stopped first, the stopping control of reel 4 is performed so that the symbol combination "Replay Replay Replay" stops on the active line.

In the fourth embodiment, in a game during the CZ state, a lottery is held to transition to a pseudo bonus state mainly when a rare role or special replay role is won.
In other words, the main control unit 10, which serves as a lottery means, is equipped with a special gaming state right granting means that can grant a special right (right to transition to a pseudo-bonus state) to generate a pseudo-bonus state as a special gaming state based on the winning of a rare role or a special replay role.

First, referring to Figure 32, we will explain the transition of the game state when the CZ state occurs.
Figure 32 shows a case where a special replay role and a rare role are won in a game during the CZ state, but the lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus state is not won.

As shown in Figure 32, when the gaming state transitions from the normal gaming state to the CZ state (timing t30), in the game during the CZ state, a lottery is held to transition to a pseudo-bonus state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.
Then, if a special replay role is won during a game in the CZ state (timing t31), a lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus state will be held.
FIG. 32 shows a case where the lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus state is not won, so the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state (special right) is not granted.

In addition, if a rare role is won during a game in the CZ state (timing t32), a lottery to transition to the pseudo bonus state will be held. However, as mentioned above, Figure 32 shows a case where the lottery to transition to the pseudo bonus state is not won, so in this case too, the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state (special right) will not be granted.

Then, when the number of games played during the CZ state reaches a specified number of games (e.g., 10 games) (timing t33), a lottery regarding the end of the CZ state will be held in the subsequent game.

In this fourth embodiment, the CZ state continues unconditionally (except in the case of a transition to a pseudo-bonus state) until a specified number of games (e.g., 10) have been played, and if the right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state has not been granted in the game after the specified number of games have been played, the CZ state ends when a normal replay role is won.
Therefore, in games that exceed the specified number, the CZ state will continue unless a normal replay role is won, and during that time, a lottery is held to transition to a highly advantageous pseudo-bonus state.

Details will be provided later, but if the right to transition to a pseudo-bonus state is granted when a rare role is won, a specified premonition period is set, so in games that exceed the specified number of games during the premonition period in which the right to transition to this pseudo-bonus state is granted, the CZ state will not end even if a regular replay role is won.

As shown in the figure, if a normal replay role is won in a game that exceeds the specified number of games (timing t34), the condition for terminating the CZ state is met, and the game state will transition to the normal game state from the next game.
The specified number of games may be any number such as 20 games or 30 games.
In addition, push order navigation may be executed when the push order bell role is won during the CZ state, or when the push order bell role is won, push order navigation may be executed with a lower probability (for example, 60%) than during the pseudo bonus state or AT state.

Next, referring to Figure 33, we will explain the lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus state in the main control unit 10 during the CZ state.
Figure 33 shows the probability of winning the pseudo bonus state when the transition lottery trigger role to the pseudo bonus state is won under the control of the main control unit 10 during the CZ state.
In addition, the main control device 10 performs a lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus state by extracting a predetermined random number when each transition lottery trigger role is won.

As shown in Figure 33, if a special replay role is won in a game during the CZ state, a lottery is held to transition to a pseudo bonus state so that there is an 80% probability of not winning and a 20% probability of winning.
In addition, if a rare role (strong or weak watermelon role, strong or weak cherry role, or chance role) is won during a game in the CZ state, a lottery is held to transition to a pseudo bonus state so that there is a 60% chance of not winning and a 40% chance of winning.

Furthermore, if a special replay role is won during the CZ state and the lottery for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state is also won, the game state will transition to the pseudo bonus state from the game following that game.
On the other hand, as will be described in more detail later, if a rare role is won during the CZ state and the player also wins the lottery to transition to the pseudo bonus state, a premonition period will be set until the special replay role is won, and the game state will transition to the pseudo bonus state from the next game after the special replay role is won during this premonition period.

Furthermore, in the main control device 10, when a transition to a pseudo bonus state occurs due to the winning of a special replay role, a pseudo bonus state is generated that continues for 30 games.
On the other hand, when a rare combination results in a transition to a pseudo bonus state, the system is designed to selectively generate either a pseudo bonus state lasting for 30 games or a pseudo bonus state lasting for 50 games, as will be described in more detail below.

In the fourth embodiment, if a role other than the special replay role and rare role is won in a game during the CZ state, the lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus state is not held. However, a lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus state may also be held when a role other than the special replay role and rare role is won. However, when a role other than the special replay role and rare role is won, it is preferable to make the probability of winning the transition to the pseudo bonus state lower than when the special replay role and rare role are won.

In addition, the role that triggers the transition to the pseudo bonus state in a game during the CZ state may be other than those mentioned above, but it is preferable that it includes a role that causes a special pattern combination to stop only when the player performs a reverse push operation.
In addition, the probability of winning the pseudo bonus state when winning the transition lottery trigger role for each pseudo bonus state may be other than the above, as long as the probability of transitioning to the pseudo bonus state is higher during the CZ state than during the normal game state.
As described above, the CZ state is realized in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment.

[Control when a special replay role is won during the CZ state in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment]
Next, referring to Figures 34 to 36, we will explain the control by the main control unit 10 and the display control by the sub-control unit 20 in the case where a special replay role is won during the CZ state and the transition to a pseudo bonus state occurs in the gaming machine (slot machine 1) of this fourth embodiment.

First, referring to Figure 34, we will explain the transition of the game state when a special replay role is won during the CZ state and the transition lottery to the pseudo bonus state at that time is won, and the display content (presentation) on the main display unit 8.
As shown in Figure 34, when the gaming state transitions from the normal gaming state to the CZ state (timing t35), in the game during the CZ state, a lottery is held to transition to a pseudo bonus state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

In addition, during normal gameplay, the effects corresponding to the normal gameplay are executed by the main display 8, sub-display 17, lamp 11, and speaker 9, but when the gameplay transitions to the CZ state, the effects corresponding to the CZ state are executed by the main display 8, sub-display 17, lamp 11, and speaker 9.

Then, if a special replay role is won during a game in the CZ state (timing t36), a lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus state will be held.
FIG. 34 shows a case where the lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus state is won, and therefore the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state is granted in this case.

In addition, if the player wins the lottery for transitioning to a pseudo bonus state when a special replay role is won, an instruction display is given on the main display 8 or the like during the game to encourage the player to stop reel 4 with a special operation (reverse push) and stop a special pattern combination.
As mentioned above, in a game in which a special replay role is won, if a special operation (reverse push) is performed to stop reel 4, a special symbol combination can be stopped. If the push operation at this time is appropriate, the special symbol combination ("7-7-7") will stop.

Then, when the next game of the game that won the pseudo bonus state transition lottery starts (timing t37), the game state will transition from the CZ state to the pseudo bonus state.
Therefore, in this case, the CZ state will end and the pseudo bonus state will begin before the number of games in the CZ state reaches the specified number of games (timing t38).
Furthermore, when the gaming state transitions to a pseudo bonus state, a presentation corresponding to the pseudo bonus state is executed by the main display device 8, etc.

In addition, even if an improper pressing operation is performed in a game in which a special replay role is won and the special symbol combination ("7-7-7") does not stop, the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state is granted, so the pseudo bonus state will be transitioned to at the start of the game following the game in which the pseudo bonus state transition lottery was won (timing t37).

Next, referring to Figure 35, we will explain the image presentation on the main display 8 when a special replay role is won during the CZ state and the transition lottery to the pseudo bonus state at that time is won.
In addition, various performance images on the main display 8 are displayed under the control of the sub-controller 20 based on control information from the main controller 10.

First, as shown in Figure 35 (a), when the game state transitions from the normal game state to the CZ state (timing t35 in Figure 34), during the CZ state, a CZ state image 50a is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8, allowing the player to recognize that the game is in the CZ state.
The CZ state image 50a may be any image that allows the player to recognize that he or she is in the CZ state, and may be a still image or a video image consisting of a specified character, background, etc.

In addition, a CZ state game number image 51 is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the main display 8, which indicates the number of remaining games relative to the specified number of games during the CZ state.
The CZ state game number image 51 consists of an image containing numerical information, and is updated by subtraction in accordance with the progress of the game during the CZ state.
In addition, if the specified number of games is exceeded, it is preferable to change the CZ state game number image 51 to symbol information such as "?".

If a special replay role is won during a game in the CZ state, a lottery to transition to the pseudo bonus state is held, and if the lottery to transition to the pseudo bonus state is won (timing t36 in Figure 34), the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state is granted.

For example, as shown in Figure 35 (b), in a game in which the CZ state game count image 51 becomes "8G", if a special replay role is won and the transition lottery to the pseudo bonus state is won, the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state is granted, and an instruction display will be executed during the execution of the game.
Then, below the CZ state image 50a on the screen of the main display 8, a pattern instruction image 52a consisting of text information "Aim for 7" encouraging the player to stop a special pattern combination ("7-7-7"), and an operation instruction image 52b showing the stopping order (stopping direction) of the reel 4 are displayed side by side in the left-right direction as special operation information.
Therefore, during the execution of a game in which a special replay role has been won and the transition lottery to the pseudo bonus state has been won, an instruction display is given on the main display 8 encouraging the player to stop the reel 4 by operating the stop button 5 with a special operation (reverse push) and to stop a special pattern combination.

When the player operates the reel 4 to stop in accordance with the above-mentioned instructions, a special symbol combination in which the 7 symbols 54a are lined up on the pay line of each reel 4 will stop, as shown in Figure 35 (c).
In addition, the pattern indication image 52a and the operation indication image 52b displayed on the screen of the main display 8 are erased, and instead a bonus confirmation image 52c consisting of the text information "BONUS CONFIRMED" is displayed to notify that a pseudo bonus state has occurred.

Although not shown in the figure, when the game following the game that won the lottery to transition to the pseudo bonus state is started (timing t37 in Figure 34), the pseudo bonus state is started and the effects during the pseudo bonus state are executed on the main display 8.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 35 (d), if a special replay role is won in a game during the CZ state, but the transition lottery to the pseudo bonus state at that time is not won, a push order navigation image 22 showing the push order other than the special operation (reverse push) will be displayed below the CZ state image 50a on the screen of the main display 8.
For example, as shown in the figure, a push order navigation image 22 consisting of numerical information of "1, 3, 2" is displayed, encouraging the left reel 4a to stop first, the right reel 4c to stop second, and the center reel 4b to stop third.

In addition, the push order navigation image 22 at this time may be any push order other than the special operation (reverse push).
In addition, since a normal player often starts the game by stopping the left reel 4a first, if the player does not win the lottery for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state, the push order navigation image 22 may not be displayed (i.e., no instruction information may be given).

As mentioned above, if the stop button 5 is pressed in a sequence other than the special operation (reverse pressing) when a special replay role is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the normal replay role will stop, and as shown in Figure 35 (e), the symbol combination corresponding to the normal replay role in which the replay symbols 54b are lined up on the pay line on each reel 4 will stop.

Furthermore, if the conditions for terminating the CZ state are not met, the presentation during the CZ state will continue to be executed with the start of the game next to the game in which the special replay role was won (not shown in the illustration).
In this case, even if the push order navigation image 22 is ignored and a special operation is performed in the game, resulting in the symbol combination of "7-7-7" (special symbol combination) stopping, the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state is not granted, so there will be no transition to the pseudo bonus state.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, in a game in which a special replay role is won during the CZ state, if the right to transition to a pseudo bonus state is granted, a pattern instruction image 52a and an operation instruction image 52b are displayed on the main display 8, and an instruction performance for stopping the pattern combination of "7-7-7" (special pattern combination) is executed.
In other words, the sub-controller 20 is equipped with a notification control means capable of notifying special operation information (pattern instruction image 52a, operation instruction image 52b) for deriving a special result (the pattern combination of "7-7-7" (special pattern combination)) when a special right (right to transition to a pseudo-bonus state) is granted by the special game state right granting means (main controller 10) in a game in which the lottery result of the lottery means (main controller 10) is the first lottery result (winning a special replay role).

Therefore, by performing the stopping operation in accordance with the displayed pattern instruction image 52a and operation instruction image 52b, the special pattern combination will stop when the pseudo bonus state begins, making it possible for the player to reliably recognize the start of the pseudo bonus state.
In addition, the special symbol combination is stopped by the player's stopping operation on reel 4, so that a pseudo-bonus state occurs in the same manner as a so-called real bonus, which makes it possible to give the player even more joy.

In addition, in a game in which a special replay role is won during the CZ state, if the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state is not granted, a push order navigation image 22 is displayed that prevents the special symbol combination from stopping.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the special symbol combination from stopping even when the pseudo bonus state is not won, and it is possible to progress with the game without any sense of incongruity when the pseudo bonus state is not won.

In addition, in a game in which a special replay role is won during the CZ state, if the right to transition to a pseudo bonus state is granted, the special symbol combination can be stopped by pressing the buttons in reverse as a special operation, but the special symbol combination can also be stopped by pressing the buttons in a different order.

Next, referring to Figure 36, we will explain the presentation image on the main display 8 when a normal replay role is won during the CZ state.
As mentioned above, in a game in which a special replay role is won during the CZ state, if the right to transition to a pseudo bonus state is granted, an instruction display for stopping the special pattern combination is executed on the main display 8. However, in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, in a game within a specified number of games during the CZ state, a similar instruction display is executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%) when a normal replay role is won.

Therefore, in this case, even if the player stops reel 4 with the special operation as instructed, the special symbol combination will not be stopped, so the instruction display when a normal replay role is won will be a fake instruction display.
As mentioned above, in this fourth embodiment, in a game in which a normal replay role is won, if a special operation is performed, the symbol combination “Replay 7 7” will stop on reel 4.

Figure 36 shows a presentation image on the main display 8 when a fake instruction presentation is executed with a predetermined probability when a normal replay role is won in a game during the CZ state.
When executing a fake instruction performance, when a normal replay role is won in a game during the CZ state, the main control unit 10 conducts a lottery to determine whether or not to execute a fake instruction performance. If the result of this lottery is that a fake instruction performance is to be executed, the main control unit 10 transmits control information to the sub-control unit 20 instructing the execution of the fake instruction performance, and based on the reception of the control information, the fake instruction performance is executed on the main display 8 under the control of the sub-control unit 20.
When a normal replay role is won in a game during the CZ state, the main control unit 10 draws a predetermined random number to determine whether or not to execute a fake instruction performance, and executes the fake instruction performance with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%).

First, as shown in FIG. 36(a), when a normal replay role is won in a specified game during the CZ state (for example, a game in which the CZ state game count image 51 is "8G") and it is decided to execute a fake instruction effect, just as in the case of winning a special replay role, a pattern instruction image 52a consisting of text information "Aim for 7" encouraging the stopping of a special pattern combination ("7-7-7") and an operation instruction image 52b showing the stopping order (stopping direction) of reel 4 are displayed side by side in the left-right direction as special operation information below the CZ state image 50a on the screen of the main display 8, just as in the case of winning a special replay role.

When the player operates the reel 4 to stop in accordance with the fake instruction presentation, a symbol combination ("Replay 7 7") will stop on the active line, in which the replay symbol 54b is lined up on the left reel 4a, and the 7 symbol 54a is lined up on each of the middle reel 4b and the right reel 4c, as shown in FIG. 36(b).
In other words, when the fake instruction effect is executed, even if the player performs the appropriate stopping operation, the special symbol combination will not stop, and a symbol combination other than the special symbol combination will stop, and the player will be notified that the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state has not been granted.

However, since the 7 symbol 54a will stop on each of the center reel 4b and the right reel 4c, part of the special symbol combination will be formed until halfway through the special operation (reverse push), and the player will not be able to know whether or not the special symbol combination will stop until the final left reel 4a stops.
Then, although not shown in the figure, when the game following the game in which the fake instruction effect was executed is started, the effect during the CZ state will continue to be executed on the main display 8.

In addition, if the number of games during the CZ state exceeds a specified number of games, the sub-controller 20 is configured to always execute a fake instruction performance when a normal replay role is won in that game.
As mentioned above, the CZ state is configured to end when a normal replay role is won in a game that exceeds a specified number of games.

Therefore, in the final game when the CZ state ends, a fake instruction effect will always be executed, making it possible to keep the player's expectations up until the final game.
However, as will be described in detail later, if the right to transition to a pseudo bonus state has been granted by winning a rare role, the CZ state will continue even if a normal replay role is won in a game that exceeds the specified number of games.In this case, the CZ state will continue even if the fake instruction performance is executed.
In addition, after the final game in which the CZ state ends is completed, a presentation image announcing the end of the CZ state may be displayed on the main display 8.

As described above, since the fake instruction performance is executed with a predetermined probability when a normal replay role is won in a game during the CZ state, it is possible to increase the interest of playing during the CZ state.
In addition, since a fake instruction effect is executed when a normal replay role, which has a relatively high probability of winning, is won, it is possible to increase the frequency of execution of an instruction effect (or a fake instruction effect) that may grant the right to transition to a pseudo bonus state during the CZ state, thereby increasing the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, if the reel 4 is stopped according to the fake instructions, some of the special symbol combinations will stop as each reel 4 stops, making it possible to play a highly entertaining game that will hold the player's expectations until the game ends.

In addition, the probability of executing a fake instruction effect when a normal replay role is won in a game during the CZ state may be any.
In addition, the selection of whether or not to execute the fake instruction performance may be performed by the sub-control device 20.
As described above, control is performed when a special replay role is won during the CZ state in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment.

[Control when a rare role is won during the CZ state in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment]
Next, referring to Figures 37 to 39, we will explain the control by the main control unit 10 and the display control (display content) by the sub-control unit 20 in the case where a transition to a pseudo bonus state occurs due to a rare role being won during the CZ state in the gaming machine (slot machine 1) of this fourth embodiment.

First, referring to Figure 37, we will explain the transition of the game state when a rare role is won during the CZ state and the transition lottery to the pseudo bonus state at that time is won, and the display content (presentation) on the main display 8.
As shown in Figure 37, when the gaming state transitions from the normal gaming state to the CZ state (timing t39), in the game during the CZ state, a lottery is held to transition to a pseudo-bonus state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

In addition, during the normal game state, the effects corresponding to the normal game state are executed on the main display 8, etc., but when the game state transitions to the CZ state, the effects corresponding to the CZ state are executed on the main display 8, etc.

Then, if a rare role is won during a game in the CZ state (timing t40), a lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus state will be held.
FIG. 37 shows a case where the lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus state is won, and therefore the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state is granted in this case.

In this fourth embodiment, when a rare role is won and the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state is granted, the pseudo bonus state is not transitioned to from the next game, but is transitioned to the pseudo bonus state after the premonition period (main premonition period) has elapsed.
This premonition period (timing t40 to t41) continues until the lottery result of the lottery means in the subsequent game indicates that the special replay role is won.
Therefore, if a player wins a rare role and then wins a special replay role in a game executed after the player has been granted the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state, the game state will transition to the pseudo bonus state from the next game.

In addition, during the premonition period (main premonition period), a CZ premonition effect (main CZ premonition effect) is executed on the main display 8.
If a special replay role is won during the premonition period (main premonition period), an instruction display is given on the main display 8 or the like during the game to encourage the player to stop the reel 4 with a special operation (reverse push) and stop a special pattern combination.
Therefore, in a game in which this special replay role is won, if a special operation (reverse push) is performed to stop reel 4, it is possible to stop the special symbol combination, and if the eye-pushing operation at this time is appropriate, the special symbol combination ("7-7-7") will stop.

Then, when the game following the game in which the special replay role was won during the premonition period (main premonition period) starts (timing t42), the game state will transition from the CZ state to a pseudo bonus state.
Therefore, in this case, the CZ state will end and the pseudo bonus state will begin before the number of games in the CZ state reaches the specified number of games (timing t43).
Furthermore, when the gaming state transitions to a pseudo bonus state, a presentation corresponding to the pseudo bonus state is executed by the main display device 8, etc.

In addition, even if an improper pressing operation is performed in a game in which the special replay role is won and the special symbol combination ("7-7-7") does not stop, the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state is granted, so the pseudo bonus state will be transitioned to at the start of the game following the game in which the lottery for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state was won (timing t42).

Also, although not shown in the figure, a premonition period (fake premonition period) is set even if a rare role is won but the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state is not granted, and under the control of the sub-control device 20, a CZ premonition effect (CZ fake premonition effect) is executed on the main display 8, in which an effect image similar to that displayed when the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state is granted is displayed.
This fake premonition period will end if a special replay role or a regular replay role is won in the game during that period.
However, during the fake premonition period, even if a special replay role is won (a win that does not grant the right to transition to a pseudo bonus state), no instruction performance will be performed, and the fake premonition period will end when the pattern combination corresponding to the normal replay role stops.

In addition, even if the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state has been granted, there may be cases where the number of games exceeds the prescribed number of games (timing t43) without the special replay role being won, but in this case too, the premonition period (main premonition period) will continue, and the player will transition to the pseudo bonus state if the special replay role is won in the subsequent game.

In addition, there may be cases where the number of games exceeds the specified number of games during the fake premonition period without winning either the special replay role or the normal replay role. In this case, for example, if a normal replay role is won in the subsequent game (timing t44), the fake premonition period will end and the CZ state itself will also end.

In addition, if the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state is granted by winning a special replay role in a game during the fake premonition period, the instruction performance will be executed in that game and the game will transition to the pseudo bonus state from the next game, and if the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state is granted by winning a rare role in a game during the fake premonition period, the fake premonition period will change to the main premonition period.

Next, referring to Figure 38, we will explain the image that is displayed on the main display 8 when a rare role is won during the CZ state and the transition lottery to the pseudo bonus state is won at that time.
In addition, various performance images on the main display 8 are displayed under the control of the sub-controller 20 based on control information from the main controller 10.

First, as shown in Figure 38 (a), when the game state transitions from the normal game state to the CZ state (timing t39 in Figure 37), during the CZ state, a CZ state image 50a is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8, allowing the player to recognize that he or she is in the CZ state.
In addition, a CZ state game number image 51 is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the main display 8, which indicates the number of remaining games in the CZ state.

As shown in the figure, when a rare role, for example a strong watermelon role, is won during a game in the CZ state, the watermelon symbols 54c will stop in a line on reel 4 sloping downward to the right.
In addition, if a rare role is won, a lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus state is held, and if this lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus state is won (timing t40 in Figure 37), the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state will be granted.

When a rare role is won, a CZ premonition effect (CZ main premonition effect) is executed according to the setting of the premonition period (main premonition period), and as shown in Figure 38 (b), the CZ state image 50a on the main display 8 is changed to a premonition CZ state image 50b indicating the premonition period.
In addition, the premonition CZ state image 50b displayed during the CZ premonition performance can be any image as long as the player can recognize that it is different from the CZ state image 50a by changing the background color, etc., but it is preferable to display an image that increases the player's sense of anticipation.

Then, as shown in Figure 38 (c), if a special replay role is won (timing t41 in Figure 37) in a game during the premonition period (main premonition period) (for example, a game in which the CZ state game number image 51 becomes "5G"), the right to transition to a pseudo bonus state is granted, and an instruction display is executed during the game.
By executing this instruction performance, a pattern instruction image 52a consisting of text information "Aim for 7" encouraging the stopping of a special pattern combination ("7-7-7") and an operation instruction image 52b showing the stopping order (stopping direction) of reel 4 are displayed side by side in the left-right direction as special operation information below the premonition CZ state image 50b on the screen of the main display 8.

Therefore, during the premonition period (main premonition period), while a game in which a special replay role has been won is being played, the main display 8 displays an instruction prompting the player to stop the reels 4 by operating the stop button 5 with a special operation (reverse push) and to stop the special symbol combination.

When the player operates the reel 4 to stop in accordance with the above-mentioned instructions, a special symbol combination in which the 7 symbols 54a are lined up on the pay line of each reel 4 will stop, as shown in Figure 38 (d).
In addition, the pattern indication image 52a and the operation indication image 52b displayed on the screen of the main display 8 are erased, and instead a bonus confirmation image 52c consisting of the text information "BONUS CONFIRMED" is displayed to notify that a pseudo bonus state has occurred.

Then, although not shown in the figure, when the game following the game that won the lottery to transition to the pseudo bonus state is started (timing t42 in Figure 37), the pseudo bonus state is started and the presentation during the pseudo bonus state is executed on the main display 8.
In addition, the premonition period (main premonition period) will continue until a special replay role is won, so even if the CZ state exceeds the specified number of games, the CZ premonition effect (main CZ premonition effect) will continue to be executed.

In addition, in some games (including games that exceed the specified number of games) during the premonition period (main premonition period) when a normal replay role is won, an instruction display (fake instruction display) is executed on the main display 8.
In other words, the sub-control device 20 executes a fake instruction display on the main display device 8 with a predetermined probability (e.g., 60%) when a normal replay role is won during a game (including games that exceed the specified number of games) during the premonition period (main premonition period).
However, in this case, even if reel 4 stops according to the instructions, the special pattern combination does not stop, so there is no transition to a pseudo bonus state, and the premonition period (main premonition period) continues thereafter.

That is, in a game during the premonition period (main premonition period), even if a normal replay role is won, the same instruction performance is executed as when a special replay role is won.
In addition, if a normal replay role is won in a game during the premonition period (main premonition period), the instruction performance may be executed without fail (with a 100% probability).
In addition, when the number of games played during the premonition period (main premonition period) exceeds a specified number of games, the instruction performance may not be executed if a normal replay role is won.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 38(e), even if a rare role is won in a game during the CZ state but the transition lottery to the pseudo bonus state at that time is not won, a CZ premonition effect (CZ fake premonition effect) is executed according to the setting of the premonition period (fake premonition period), and similarly to the above, the CZ state image 50a on the main display 8 is changed to a premonition CZ state image 50b indicating the premonition period.

Then, as shown in Figure 38 (f), if a special replay role that does not grant the right to transition to a pseudo bonus state is won in a game during the premonition period (fake premonition period), a push order navigation image 22 showing the push order other than the special operation (reverse push) will be displayed below the CZ state image 50a on the screen of the main display 8.
For example, as shown in the figure, a push order navigation image 22 consisting of numerical information of "1, 3, 2" is displayed, encouraging the left reel 4a to stop first, the right reel 4c to stop second, and the center reel 4b to stop third.

If the right to transition to a pseudo bonus state is granted when the special replay role is won, the pattern instruction image 52a and operation instruction image 52b will be displayed instead of the push order navigation image 22, and an instruction performance will be executed to stop the special pattern combination.

When the stop button 5 is pressed in a sequence other than the special operation (reverse pressing), the symbol combination corresponding to the normal replay role will stop, and as shown in FIG. 38(g), the symbol combination corresponding to the normal replay role in which the replay symbols 54b are lined up on the pay line on each reel 4 will stop.

Then, if the condition for terminating the CZ state is not met, (not shown in the figure) when the next game following the game in which the special replay role was won starts, the premonition CZ state image 50b is changed to the CZ state image 50a, the fake premonition period ends, and the performance during the CZ state continues.
In this case, even if the push order navigation image 22 is ignored and a special operation is performed in the game, resulting in the symbol combination of "7-7-7" (special symbol combination) stopping, the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state is not granted, so there will be no transition to the pseudo bonus state.

In addition, if the special replay role is won during the fake premonition period in a game that exceeds the specified number of games, the CZ state will end due to the special replay role being won, and the main display 8 will change to the presentation image during normal game play.

Also, although not shown in the figures, if a normal replay role is won in a game during the fake premonition period, an instruction display (fake instruction display) is executed on the main display 8.
However, in this case, even if reel 4 stops according to the instructed presentation, the special pattern combination does not stop, so there is no transition to a pseudo bonus state, and furthermore, the fake premonition period ends when a normal replay role is won, so that when the next game starts, the premonition CZ state image 50b is changed to the CZ state image 50a, the fake premonition period ends, and a return to the presentation during the normal CZ state occurs.

Also, as mentioned above, the fake instruction performance will be executed even if a normal replay role is won during the main premonition period, so the state transition after the end of this fake instruction performance will determine whether the state at that time is the main premonition period or the fake premonition period.
In addition, the fake premonition period may be set to end with a specified probability when a normal replay role is won. In this case, even if the premonition period continues after the fake instruction performance ends, the player will not be able to tell whether it is still a real premonition period or a fake premonition period, making it possible to prolong the player's anticipation.

In addition, if a normal replay role is won during the fake premonition period in a game that exceeds a specified number of games, an instruction effect (fake instruction effect) is executed on the main display 8.
In this case, the winning of the normal replay role ends not only the fake premonition period but also the CZ state itself, so the special pattern combination is not stopped, and the start of the next game ends the fake premonition period and the CZ state, returning to the presentation during the normal game state.

In other words, if an instruction effect (including a fake instruction effect) is executed during the premonition period, there are cases where the state transitions to a pseudo-bonus state (in the case of the main premonition period), cases where the premonition period continues without transitioning to a pseudo-bonus state (in the case of the main premonition period), and even cases where the premonition period ends (in the case of the fake premonition period).

As described above, in the fourth embodiment of the slot machine 1, if a rare role is won in addition to a special replay role during a game in the CZ state, a lottery is held to transition to the pseudo bonus state, and if this transition lottery is won, the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state is granted.

In other words, the main control unit 10, as a special game state right granting means, is capable of granting a special right (the right to transition to a pseudo bonus state) based on the lottery result of the lottery means being a second lottery result (winning a rare role) that is different from the first lottery result (winning a special replay role).
Therefore, the transition patterns of the pseudo-bonus state during the CZ state become more diverse, making it possible to increase the interest of the game and the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, if the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state is granted by winning a rare role during the CZ state, the transition to the pseudo bonus state is not made immediately, but is made to wait for a prescribed period of time, and if a special replay role is won in the subsequent game, an instruction display is executed to stop the special pattern combination that triggers the transition to the pseudo bonus state, making it possible to start the pseudo bonus state.

In other words, when a special right (right to transition to a pseudo bonus state) is granted by the special game state right granting means (main control unit 10) based on the derivation of the second lottery result (winning a rare role), the sub-control unit 20, which serves as the notification control means, is able to wait to notify the special operation information (pattern instruction image 52a, operation instruction image 52b) until the lottery result of the lottery means (main control unit 10) becomes the first lottery result.

Therefore, even if the right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state is granted during the CZ state, a game mode can be created in which the transition to the pseudo-bonus state does not occur immediately, making it possible to further diversify gameplay during the CZ state.

Also, even when the pseudo bonus state is entered after waiting, the pseudo bonus state is entered when a special replay role is won and a special symbol combination stops, so that the player can be sure that he or she will be aware of the transition to the pseudo bonus state.
In addition, the special symbol combination is stopped by the player's stopping operation on reel 4, so that a pseudo bonus state occurs in the same progression as a so-called real bonus, which makes it possible to give the player even more joy.

In addition, when a rare role is won in a game during the CZ state, if the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state is not granted, the sub-control unit 20 executes a CZ fake premonition performance for a predetermined period of time, and if the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state is granted, the sub-control unit 20 executes a CZ main premonition performance during the main premonition period, which is the period during which the transition to the pseudo bonus state is awaited.
In other words, the sub-controller 20 is equipped with a presentation control means that is capable of executing premonition presentations (CZ main premonition presentation, CZ fake premonition presentation) based on the result of the lottery means (main controller 10) becoming the second lottery result (winning a rare role).
Therefore, if a rare role is won in a game during the CZ state, it is possible to increase the interest of the game and also to increase the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, when the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state is granted by winning a rare role during the CZ state, the transition to the pseudo bonus state is made to wait until a special replay role is won in a subsequent game. However, if a predetermined number of games (e.g., 30) have been played after the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state has been granted but the special replay role has not been won, the transition to the pseudo bonus state may be forcibly made.
In addition, if a predetermined number of games (e.g., 30) have been played after the right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state has been granted but no special replay role has been won, a predetermined benefit (e.g., the right to extend the period of the pseudo-bonus state) may be granted.

In addition, if a rare role is won during the CZ state and the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state is granted, the premonition period accompanied by the premonition performance is allowed to continue until a special replay role is won in the subsequent game. However, the premonition period may continue until a predetermined number of games (e.g., 10 games) have been played, and if a special replay role is not won during this time, a notification may be issued based on the end of the premonition period that the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state has been granted, and the pseudo bonus state may be transitioned to.

In this case, if a special replay role is won during this premonition period, it is preferable to execute an instruction display in the winning game, and notify (transition to the pseudo bonus state) that the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state has been granted at that point (without waiting for the execution of the above-mentioned specified number of games), regardless of whether or not a special pattern combination has stopped.
In addition, even if the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state is not granted when a rare role is won during the CZ state, the fake premonition period (fake premonition presentation) may be controlled to continue for only a predetermined number of games (e.g., 10 games) as described above, and the fake premonition period may end when the predetermined number of games have been played.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the selection lottery for the number of continuation games of the pseudo bonus state during this premonition period will be described.
As mentioned above, in the main control unit 10, in a game in which a rare role is won during the CZ state, if the player wins the lottery to transition to the pseudo bonus state, the premonition period is set, and if a special replay role is won in a game during the premonition period, the game will transition to the pseudo bonus state.When this special replay role is won, the number of games in which the pseudo bonus state will continue is also determined.

Therefore, when a rare role is won during the CZ state, resulting in a transition to the pseudo bonus state, the number of games that the pseudo bonus state continues will change.
In addition, if the pseudo bonus state is entered not by winning a rare role but by winning a special replay role during the CZ state, the number of continuing games in the pseudo bonus state will not change, and only the specified number of games (30 games) will be set.

In addition, during the game in this premonition period, there is a possibility of winning a rare role again. In such a case, even though the right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state has already been granted, the player will win a rare role with a low probability of winning, which may cause dissatisfaction to the player.
In order to solve such problems, in the fourth embodiment, in the game during the premonition period, if a rare role is won again, control is performed so that the number of continuing games in the pseudo-bonus state that is advantageous to the player is likely to be selected.

Figure 39 shows the winning probability for each number of continuing games determined by a selection lottery for the number of continuing games in the pseudo bonus state in the main control unit 10, and shows the selection lottery probability for the number of continuing games in the pseudo bonus state when transitioning to the pseudo bonus state during the premonition period in the CZ state.
In addition, the main control device 10 selects the number of games to be continued in the pseudo bonus state by sampling a predetermined random number when each selection lottery trigger role is won.

As shown in Figure 38, if a rare role is won in a game during this premonition period, a selection lottery is held to determine the number of continuing games in the pseudo bonus state to 30 games with a 50% probability, and to determine the number of continuing games in the pseudo bonus state to 50 games with a 50% probability.
During this premonition period, there is a possibility of winning a rare role multiple times, but the above lottery is held each time a rare role is won, and if 50 games are won even once, the number of continuing games is fixed at 50 games at that point, and if 30 games are won, a selection lottery is held again in the subsequent games when a rare role is won.

In addition, in a game during this premonition period, if a special replay role that triggers a transition to the pseudo bonus state is won, i.e., if the next game is to transition to the pseudo bonus state, a selection lottery will be held to determine the number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state to 30 games with a 70% probability, and to determine the number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state to 50 games with a 30% probability, except in cases where 50 games have not already been determined when a rare role was won.

As described above, when the premonition period transitions to the pseudo-bonus state, the number of continuing games in the pseudo-bonus state changes in various ways, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.
Furthermore, if a rare role is won during the CZ state and the actual premonition period begins, if the player wins a rare role again in the subsequent game during the actual premonition period, a lottery will be held to select the number of games that the pseudo bonus state will continue to play. Therefore, if a rare role is won during the actual premonition period, there is a possibility that the number of games that the pseudo bonus state will continue to play will increase, and there is a possibility that a beneficial benefit will be awarded to the player.

In other words, the main control unit 10 is equipped with a bonus lottery means that can execute a lottery for the awarding of a specific bonus (50 continuing games) in a game after the special game state right awarding means (main control unit 10) has granted a special right (right to transition to a pseudo bonus state) based on the second lottery result (winning a rare role).
Therefore, even if the player wins a rare role again during this premonition period, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming dissatisfied and to increase the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, each time a rare role is won during this premonition period, the likelihood of the number of continuing games increasing increases, so the longer this premonition period is, the more likely it is that the player's sense of anticipation will increase.
In particular, in the fourth embodiment, the premonition period is not fixed but continues until the special replay role is won. Therefore, even if the special replay role is not won and the start of the pseudo bonus state is delayed, the possibility of a selection lottery being held for the number of continuing games increases, making it possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation.

In addition, even if the number of continuing games is not determined to be 50 when a rare role is won during this premonition period, the selection lottery will be held again when a special replay role is won, so it is possible to prevent the player's expectations from decreasing even if they do not win a rare role during this premonition period.

The selection probability for each number of continuing games may be other than the above.
In addition, if a player wins a rare role during this premonition period, the bonus may be something other than an increase in the number of continued games, so long as the player can receive a specific bonus.
In addition, the number of continuing games set as an option for the pseudo bonus state may be other than the above, or three or more types may be set.
As described above, control is performed when a rare role is won during the CZ state in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment.

[Control form in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment]
Next, the control mode in the gaming machine (slot machine 1) of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 40 and FIG.
In the slot machine 1 of this fourth embodiment, various presentations during the CZ state are executed under the control of the sub-controller 20, which mainly receives control information from the main control unit 10 and executes presentations on the main display unit 8, for example.

However, when executing an instruction performance (including a fake instruction performance) that prompts the player to stop a special pattern combination during the CZ state, different control forms are provided: one in which the sub-controller 20 controls the instruction performance by receiving control information directly from the main control unit 10, and one in which the sub-controller 20 controls the instruction performance independently without receiving control information directly from the main control unit 10.

Specifically, the control format is different depending on whether an instruction display is given when a special replay role that leads to a pseudo bonus state during the CZ state is won, or whether an instruction display is given when a special replay role is won during this premonition period (when an instruction display is given to start the pseudo bonus state shown in Figure 38 (c) is given).

First, referring to Figure 40, we will explain the control form when executing an instruction performance in a game in which a special replay role is won during the CZ state.
As shown in Figure 40, when an instruction display (an instruction display outside the premonition period) is performed when a special replay role that results in a pseudo bonus state during the CZ state is won, the main control unit 10 transmits control information to the sub-control unit 20 as special control information that instructs the execution of the instruction display, and upon receiving the control information, the sub-control unit 20 executes an instruction display on the main display unit 8 that prompts the special pattern combination to be stopped (arrow a4).

In other words, when the main control unit 10 wins a special replay role, it will send control information to the sub-control unit 20 to inform them that the special replay role has been won, regardless of the state at that time. At this time, if the transition lottery to the pseudo bonus state is won, it will send control information instructing the execution of an instruction performance, and the sub-control unit 20 will execute the instruction performance based on the control information received that instructs the execution of this instruction performance.

In addition, if the special replay role is won but the pseudo bonus state is not won, the main control unit 10 will transmit control information prohibiting the execution of the instruction performance, and the sub-control unit 20, upon receiving this control information prohibiting the execution of the instruction performance, will execute a performance that does not stop the special pattern combination (push order navigation image 22 in Figure 35 (d)).
Also, during the fake premonition period, a special replay role that results in a pseudo bonus state may be won, and in this case too, the sub-control device 20 will execute the instruction performance based on the reception of control information instructing the execution of the instruction performance.

On the other hand, if a rare role that results in a pseudo bonus state is won during the CZ state, and an instruction display is performed when a special replay role is won during the main premonition period, the main control unit 10 does not send control information (special control information) to the sub-control unit 20 to instruct the sub-control unit 20 to execute an instruction display on the main display 8 that prompts the sub-control unit 20 to stop the special pattern combination (arrow b4).

In other words, when the main control unit 10 wins a special replay role, it will transmit control information informing the user that the special replay role has been won. When the sub-control unit 20 receives control information informing the user that the special replay role has been won, it will determine whether the current state is within the premonition period, and if it receives control information informing the user that the special replay role has been won during the premonition period, it will execute the instruction performance without receiving control information instructing the user to execute the instruction performance.

In addition, when the sub-controller 20 receives control information informing that a special replay role has been won (but not won in the pseudo bonus state), it determines whether or not the current state is within the fake premonition period, and if it receives control information informing that a special replay role has been won during the fake premonition period, it will execute an effect that does not stop the special pattern combination without instructions from the main controller 10 (push order navigation image 22 in Figure 35 (d)).
In addition, the sub-controller 20 performs management control that enables it to understand that the current state is during the actual precursor period (or fake precursor period) by receiving control information from the main controller 10 indicating the start and end of the actual precursor period (or fake precursor period), for example.

As described above, when an instruction display is performed when a special replay role that results in a pseudo bonus state during the CZ state is won, the sub-controller 20 executes an instruction display on the main display 8 that prompts the special symbol combination to stop upon receiving control information from the main control unit 10 instructing the execution of an instruction display, whereas when an instruction display is performed when a rare role that results in a pseudo bonus state during the CZ state is won and a special replay role is subsequently won during the premonition period, the sub-controller 20 executes an instruction display on the main display 8 that prompts the special symbol combination to stop on its own, without receiving control information from the main control unit 10 instructing the execution of an instruction display.

In other words, the sub-controller 20 as a notification control means can notify special operation information (pattern instruction image 52a, operation instruction image 52b) based on receiving special control information (control information instructing the execution of an instruction performance) from the main controller 10 when a special right (right to transition to a pseudo bonus state) is granted by the special game state right granting means (main controller 10) in a game in which the lottery result of the lottery means (main controller 10) is the first lottery result (winning a special replay role), and can notify special operation information without receiving special control information (control information instructing the execution of an instruction performance) from the main controller 10 when the special right is granted by the special game state right granting means based on the derivation of the second lottery result.

This reduces the processing burden on each control device when executing instruction performance, making it possible to execute instruction performance more efficiently and reliably.

Next, referring to Figure 41, we will explain the control form when executing a fake instruction effect in a game in which a normal replay role is won during the CZ state.
As mentioned above, during the CZ state, if a normal replay role is won, a fake instruction display (see Figure 36) may be executed on the main display 8.

In this fourth embodiment, just as in the case of executing the instruction performance described above, when executing a fake instruction performance, different control forms are provided: one in which the sub-controller 20 controls the fake instruction performance by receiving control information directly from the main control unit 10, and one in which the sub-controller 20 independently controls the fake instruction performance without receiving control information directly from the main control unit 10.

Specifically, similar to the case of executing the instruction performance described above, when a fake instruction performance is performed when a normal replay role is won outside the premonition period during the CZ state, the sub-controller 20 executes the fake instruction performance on the main display 8 based on control information from the main controller 10 instructing the execution of the fake instruction performance, but when a fake instruction performance is performed when a normal replay role is won during the premonition period, the sub-controller 20 executes the fake instruction performance on the main display 8 without control information from the main controller 10 instructing the execution of the fake instruction performance.

Furthermore, if a normal replay role is won outside the premonition period during the CZ state, a lottery is held to determine with a fixed probability (for example, 50%) whether or not a fake instruction performance will be executed in the main control unit 10, and control information is sent to the sub-control unit 20 based on this lottery to instruct the execution of a fake instruction performance. However, if a normal replay role is won in a game during the premonition period during the CZ state, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a fake instruction performance will be executed in the sub-control unit 20, and the probability of executing the fake instruction performance at the time of this lottery can be changed based on the player's operation.
During the fake premonition period, the fake premonition period (or CZ state) will end based on the winning of a normal replay role, so the sub-controller 20 is designed to always execute a fake instruction display, and in this case too, the sub-controller 20 is designed to execute the fake instruction display on its own.

Figure 41 shows the control form when executing a fake instruction effect in a game in which a normal replay role is won during the premonition period in the CZ state.
In other words, this shows a control form in which the sub-control device 20 executes fake instruction performance independently.

As shown in FIG. 41, when a normal replay role is won during the main premonition period in the CZ state, the main control unit 10 does not send control information to the sub-control unit 20 instructing the execution of a fake instruction performance, but only sends control information informing the sub-control unit 20 that a normal replay role has been won (arrow c4). When the sub-control unit 20 receives control information informing the sub-control unit 20 that a normal replay role has been won, it determines whether the state at that time is in the main premonition period or not, and if it is in the main premonition period, it executes a fake instruction performance with a predetermined probability.

As shown in the figure, the sub-control device 20 has a mode 1 in which the execution of the fake instruction performance is controlled with a first probability (e.g., 40%), and a mode 2 in which the execution of the fake instruction performance is controlled with a second probability (e.g., 60%) that is higher than the first probability, and when control information indicating that a normal replay role has been won is received, the probability of executing the fake instruction performance can be changed according to these modes.
In addition, the sub-control device 20 allows mode change control based on the operation of the effect button 2d, allowing the player to change to the desired mode by operating the effect button 2d.

Therefore, when mode 1 is selected based on the operation of the effect button 2d, the execution of the fake instruction effect during this premonition period is controlled to be executed with a first probability (e.g., 40%), and when mode 2 is selected, the execution of the fake instruction effect during this premonition period is controlled to be executed with a second probability (e.g., 60%).

The above-mentioned mode change may be performed, for example, by displaying a mode selection screen on the main display 8 when no game is being played (so-called call-in state) and operating the mode selection screen with the effect button 2d, or by displaying a mode selection screen on the sub-display 17 and operating it by touching it, but it is preferable to enable selection before this premonition period.

Also, although not shown in the figure, if the sub-control device 20 receives control information indicating that a normal replay role has been won during the fake premonition period, it will always execute a fake instruction performance.
Therefore, if a normal replay role is won during the fake premonition period, the fake instruction performance will always be executed, and as a result, the fake premonition period (or CZ state) will end without the special pattern combination stopping.

As described above, when a normal replay role is won outside the premonition period during the CZ state, the sub-controller 20 executes a fake instruction performance on the main display 8 by receiving control information from the main controller 10 instructing the execution of a fake instruction performance, whereas when a normal replay role is won during the premonition period, the sub-controller 20 executes a fake instruction performance on the main display 8 on its own without receiving control information from the main controller 10 instructing the execution of a fake instruction performance.

This reduces the processing burden on each control device when executing fake instruction performance, making it possible to execute fake instruction performance more efficiently and reliably.

In addition, in the sub-control device 20, when a normal replay role is won during this premonition period, the fake instruction performance can be executed with either a first probability or a second probability.
Therefore, it is possible to diversify the presentation during the premonition period, thereby making it possible to increase the entertainment value of the game.

In addition, the sub-controller 20 makes it possible to change the probability of executing a fake instruction effect when a normal replay role is won during this premonition period, based on the operation of the effect button 2d.
In other words, the sub-controller 20, as a notification control means, is capable of notifying special operation information (pattern indication image 52a, operation indication image 52b) with a predetermined probability in a game in which the lottery result of the lottery means (main controller 10) is not the first lottery result (winning a special replay role), and is equipped with a notification change control means that can change the predetermined probability based on the player's operation.

Therefore, depending on the player's preference, the mode can be changed between a mode in which fake instruction effects are frequently executed (mode 2) and a mode in which fake instruction effects are not executed often (mode 1), making it possible to play in a way that satisfies a large number of players.

In addition, the execution probability of the fake instruction performance in mode 1 and mode 2 may be any as long as the execution probability is different.
In addition, three or more modes with different execution probabilities of fake instruction effects may be provided.
In addition, the fake instruction performance is executed when a normal replay role is won, but it may be executed when any role other than the special replay role is won.
As described above, the control form in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment is realized.

The above has described the fourth embodiment of the slot machine 1, but instead of providing a special replay role, when a normal replay role is won, the symbol combination of "7, 7, 7" may be stopped by performing a special operation (reverse push), and the symbol combination of "replay, replay, replay" may be stopped by performing an operation other than the special operation, and a pseudo bonus state may be drawn when a normal replay role is won.
In this case, during the main premonition period resulting from the winning of a rare role, an instruction display may be given to stop the symbol combination of "7-7-7" when a normal replay is won.

In addition, when a rare role is won during the premonition period, a selection lottery is held to select the number of games to continue in the pseudo bonus state, but a lottery may also be held to add an additional number of games to the initial number of games in the pseudo bonus state each time a rare role is won.
The slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment is configured as described above.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, a fifth embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

In the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment (slot machine 1), only some of the game state transition control and presentation content are different from those of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and the rest are the same as those of the first embodiment.
Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, only the points that are different from the first embodiment will be described, and the other points are the same as the first embodiment described above, so the description will be omitted.

First, in the slot machine 1 in the fifth embodiment, a part of the configuration of the winning combination is different from that in the first embodiment, and a bonus winning combination is set in addition to the replay winning combination and the small winning combination.
The bonus role is a role for generating a bonus state, which is a so-called real bonus, and the generation of the bonus state based on the winning of the bonus role results in, for example, a lottery for a predetermined role being conducted in an advantageous manner for the player.

In addition to the normal replay role and chance replay role (chance role), there is also a special replay role which is a rare role.
The special replay role will be described in detail later, but for example, when won, it is a role that can grant a specified benefit to the player during the AT state, and the probability of winning is set lower than that of a normal replay role (for example, 1/100).

In addition, in the slot machine 1 in this fifth embodiment, the types of game states are also different from those in the first embodiment described above, and instead of providing a CZ state and a pseudo bonus state, a bonus state is provided.
Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the gaming states are a normal gaming state, a bonus state, and an AT state.

If the bonus combination is won, the reels 4 are controlled to stop in the following game so that a "7-7-7" symbol combination (special symbol combination) is allowed on the winning line set on each reel 4, and if the "7-7-7" symbol combination stops on a winning line, a bonus combination is won and the game state transitions to the bonus state.

That is, in the first embodiment, in the first game during the pseudo bonus state, the symbol combination of "7-7-7" is pseudo-stopped by executing a pseudo game, but in the fifth embodiment, control is performed so that the bonus state is generated by the stopping of the symbol combination of "7-7-7".
When a bonus combination is won, no gaming value such as a payout of medals is given, and the right to win the bonus combination is maintained until the bonus combination is won.
In the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the pay line for determining whether or not a win has been won is set only to the middle line connecting the symbols stopped in the middle of each reel 4 .

[Transition of gaming state in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, a description will be given of the transition of the gaming state in the slot machine 1 in the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state in the slot machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 42, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the main control device 10 is capable of transitioning to any one of the normal gaming state, the bonus state, and the AT state, and is capable of executing control to transition from one gaming state to another gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition.

Below, we will explain in detail for each game state (normal game state, bonus state, AT state) executed by the control of the main control unit 10 and the sub-control unit 20, the transition process between game states, and the various effects that occur in conjunction with the transition process.

Unless otherwise specified below, the transition from each game state to another game state basically occurs after the third reel is stopped in the game in which the transition condition is met (or after the medals have been paid out). However, this is not limited to this, and the transition may occur from the next game after the transition condition is met.

(Normal game mode)
The normal gaming state is the gaming state in which the slot machine 1 remains when the main controller 10 is reset, and is a disadvantageous state for the player.
As shown in Fig. 42, the main control device 10 performs a lottery process for transition to the bonus state and the AT state during the normal gaming state. Depending on the specifications of the slot machine 1, it may be possible not to directly transition from the normal gaming state to the AT state.

During normal game play, similar to the first embodiment, individual effects, including winning effects that are completed in one game, are executed with a predetermined probability on the main display 8 or sub-display 17 based on the results of the lottery for the winning combination.

In addition, in the normal game state, there are a normal probability state and a high probability state, which have different winning probability states to the AT state. The winning probability of the lottery to transition to the AT state is higher in the high probability state than in the normal probability state, and the transition of the probability state is controlled so that, for example, when a weak watermelon role or a weak cherry role is won, the normal probability state transitions to the high probability state with a probability of 30%. On the other hand, as a predetermined fall condition, for example, when a replay role is won, when a push order bell role is won, and when a miss occurs, the high probability state transitions to the normal probability state with a probability of 5%.
In response to the change in the probability state, a stage change process is performed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, and in some high probability states, the stage is changed to one that suggests a high probability state.

Transition process from normal game state to bonus state (arrow a5 in FIG. 42)
In the normal gaming state, if the result of the role determination by the main control device 10 is that a bonus role is won, it is possible to transition to a bonus state (privilege) as a special gaming state.

More specifically, the main control device 10 performs stop control to allow a special symbol combination ("7-7-7") as a special symbol pattern on the reel 4 based on the winning of a bonus role as a special lottery result, and when the special symbol combination is derived on the reel 4 based on the player's operation, the game state is transitioned to a bonus state, which is a special game state advantageous to the player.

In other words, the main control unit 10 is equipped with a special game state control means capable of generating a first special game state (bonus state) as a special game state based on the establishment of a first special condition (derivation of a special lottery result).
Therefore, while in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, it was possible for a pseudo-bonus state to be generated, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, it is possible for a bonus state (a so-called real bonus) to be generated without generating a pseudo-bonus state.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, a pseudo bonus state may be generated in addition to the bonus state.
In addition, the bonus role may be won at the same time as a specified rare role (for example, a strong cherry role) (a double win), or may be won separately from other roles, or there may be both double win and single win patterns.
In addition, since the bonus role gives the player an opportunity to win a large number of medals, it is preferable to set the probability of winning the bonus role lower than that of the small role or the replay role (for example, set the probability to about 1/250).
In addition, the probability of winning a bonus role may be made variable in multiple stages according to the setting value of the probability setting device 14 .

In addition, when a bonus role is won during normal game play, a continuous presentation spanning a predetermined number of games, which is executed immediately before the transition to the pseudo-bonus state of the first embodiment, is executed, for example, on the main display 8, to heighten the player's sense of anticipation.
When the continuous performance is executed, an image showing the main character winning the battle performance is displayed, and an image notifying the player that a bonus role has been won is displayed, and an image urging the player to stop a special symbol combination is displayed on the main display 8.
However, since it is possible to stop the special symbol combination even during a game in which a continuous performance is in progress, if the special symbol combination is stopped during a game in which a continuous performance is in progress, the continuous performance will end at that point.

In addition, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, even in a game in which a bonus role is not won, a performance similar to the continuous performance is executed on the main display device 8. For example, if a bonus role is configured to be able to be won in combination with a predetermined rare role, when a predetermined rare role that has not won a bonus role is won, a continuous performance is executed in which the main character is ultimately defeated.

・Transition process from normal gaming state to AT state (arrow c5 in FIG. 42)
In the normal game state, the main control device 10 performs a lottery process for transitioning to the AT state as a special game state based on winning a predetermined rare role. For example, when a strong cherry role is won, the main control device 10 performs a transition process to the AT state with a predetermined probability (for example, 1%). The condition for transitioning to the AT state is winning this transition lottery.
In addition, in a game in a high probability state, control is performed to increase the probability of transitioning to the AT state. For example, when a strong cherry role is won, the transition process to the AT state is performed with a higher probability (e.g., 2%) than the winning probability in the normal probability state.
In addition, the transition to the AT state in the normal game state may be made on the condition that a specified rare role is won, or may be made with a specified probability (e.g., 1%) when a losing lottery result is derived in which no small role is won.

In this fifth embodiment, the transition to the AT state is mainly performed via the bonus state in order to heighten the player's sense of anticipation, and therefore the probability of transitioning directly from the normal game state to the AT state is set to be extremely low.
In addition, the probability of transitioning directly from the normal gaming state to the AT state may be made changeable depending on the set probability in the probability setting device 14, or the lottery for transitioning directly from the normal gaming state to the AT state may be won only in the case of a relatively high set value (e.g., setting 4 to 6).

Furthermore, in the case where the lottery for transition to the AT state is won during normal game play, a premonition effect (including consecutive effects) is executed after the waiting period has elapsed, similar to when the pseudo-bonus state of the first embodiment occurs, and the AT state occurs after the premonition effect ends.
In addition, if a specified rare role (for example, a strong cherry role) is won but the AT state is not entered, a fake premonition effect similar to that which occurs when the pseudo bonus state in the first embodiment occurs is executed.

In addition, when the lottery for transitioning directly from the normal game state to the AT state is won, the consecutive effects may be executed immediately without executing the premonition effect, and the transition to the AT state may be made after the execution of the consecutive effects.
In addition, similar to the transition to the pseudo bonus state in the first embodiment, a CZ state that can transition to an AT state may be provided.

(Bonus state)
The bonus state as a special gaming state (first special gaming state) is a state in which the control relating to the lottery of winning combinations by the main control device 10 is more advantageous to the player than in the normal gaming state.
That is, in the slot machine 1 in the first embodiment, a pseudo bonus state is generated as a state advantageous to the player, whereas in the slot machine 1 in the fifth embodiment, a bonus state, which is a so-called real bonus, is generated as a state advantageous to the player.

In the bonus state, the bonus state continues until the number of medals paid out during that state exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 150 medals), and the lottery control for the roles during that time is changed so that, for example, in games during the bonus state, the probability of winning the common bell role is made higher than in games during the normal game state.
Also, in the fifth embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when any of the push order bell roles 1 to 6 is won, the main control unit 10 performs stop control so that the corresponding push order bell role wins only when a stop operation is performed in a push order (specific stop mode) corresponding to the winning push order bell role.

Note that control that is advantageous to the player during the bonus state may be other than the above. For example, the probability of winning a specified rare role may be made higher than in a game during the normal game state, or the probability of winning a replay role may be made lower than in a game during the normal game state, thereby increasing the opportunities to win the push order bell role. The probability of winning the push order bell role may also be increased.

In addition, the number of medals paid out when a bell role (push order bell role and common bell role) is won may be set to be different between the bonus state and other game states.
For example, when a bell symbol is awarded during the normal game state, six medals are paid out, whereas when a bell symbol is awarded during the bonus state, fifteen medals may be paid out.

The condition for ending the bonus state is set as when the number of medals paid out during the bonus state exceeds a predetermined number (e.g., 150 medals), but it can be something else, for example, it can be set as when the number of games played during the bonus state reaches a predetermined number. The bonus state can also be ended when the number of medals acquired by the player during the bonus state (net increase in medals) exceeds a predetermined number, or when the number of medals acquired by the player due to winning the bell role during the bonus state (net increase in medals) exceeds a predetermined number.

Furthermore, as will be described in more detail later, during the bonus state, effects are performed that make it impossible or difficult for the player to distinguish that the game state at that time is an AT state, so when the common bell role is won in all or part, the same push order navigation as when the push order bell role is won may be executed.
In this case, if the common bell role is won, a push order navigation may be executed which indicates a fixed push order out of six possible push orders (for example, "5a → 5b → 5c"), or a push order navigation may be executed by randomly determining the push order.

During the bonus state, based on control information from the main control unit 10, the sub-control unit 20 executes the push order navigation for the push order bell role described above to notify the player of an advantageous operation mode, making it easier for the player to win medals.

Also, as will be described in more detail later, during a game in the bonus state, the main control unit 10 controls the lottery process for transition to the AT state to be advantageous to the player, and controls each game so that there is a predetermined probability of winning the AT state.
If the player wins the lottery for transitioning to the AT state during a game in the bonus state, the player is granted the right to transition to the AT state, and is able to transition to the AT state after the bonus state ends.
In other words, the main control unit 10, as a special game state control means, is capable of generating a second special game state (AT state) as a special game state based on the establishment of the second special condition (winning the AT state transition lottery).

In addition, the winning probability of the AT state may be any probability that transitions to the AT state is higher than the winning probability of the AT state during the normal probability state (e.g., 1%).
In addition, during a part of the bonus state, a transition lottery may be held that increases the probability of winning the AT state.

When a bonus role is won, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to transition to the AT state. Just as with the lottery for transitioning to the AT state during a game in the bonus state, if the lottery is won, the player will be granted the right to transition to the AT state.

In addition, during the bonus state, various effects are performed by the sub-control device 20, and for example, an effect that allows the player to recognize that he or she is in the bonus state is executed on the main display device 8.
Furthermore, when the bonus state occurs, the lamp 11 emits light in a predetermined manner to notify that the bonus state is in progress, and the speaker 9 outputs a predetermined sound effect to notify that the bonus state is in progress.
In other words, the sub-control device 20 is equipped with a special effect control means that is capable of executing a first special effect that allows the player to recognize that a first special game state (bonus state) has occurred based on the occurrence of a first special game state.

As described below, when a bonus role is won, or when the player wins the lottery to transition to the AT state during the bonus state, the game state will transition to the AT state after the bonus state ends. However, in the fifth embodiment, since the display control makes it impossible or difficult to distinguish between the bonus state and the AT state, even if the player wins the lottery to transition to the AT state during the bonus state, no presentation is given during the bonus state to inform the player that the lottery to transition to the AT state has been won.

Furthermore, when the gaming state transitions to the bonus state, information indicating that the state is the bonus state is output from the external output terminal 18 .
In addition, in order to prevent the gaming establishment from making any distinction between the bonus state and the AT state using a call device (not shown) for the island equipment, the gaming establishment may be configured to output common information for both the bonus state and the AT state.

・Transition process from bonus state to AT state (arrow e5 in FIG. 42)
The bonus state ends when a predetermined ending condition is met.
The condition for ending the bonus state is met when the number of medals paid out during the bonus state (including any medals missed) exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 150 medals).
The condition for ending the bonus state may be other than the above, and may be when the number of games played during the bonus state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50).

Then, at the end of the bonus state, if the right to transition to the AT state has been granted, the gaming state will transition from the bonus state to the AT state as a special gaming state (second special gaming state).
However, even if the game state transitions from the bonus state to the AT state, the various effects that were being executed during the bonus state will continue as they are.
During the AT state, push order navigation is executed in the same way as during the bonus state, and the presentation content basically does not change from that during the bonus state, so even if the game state shifts from the bonus state to the AT state, the player will perceive the bonus state as continuing as it is.

・Transition process from bonus state to normal game state (arrow b5 in FIG. 42)
If the right to transition to the AT state has not been granted at the end of the bonus state, the game state will transition from the bonus state to the normal game state when the conditions for terminating the bonus state are met.
At this time, after the final game in the bonus state is completed, an image notifying the end of the bonus state and an image notifying the number of medals won during the bonus state are displayed on the main display 8, and the game state transitions to the normal game state from the next game.

When transitioning from the bonus state to the normal game state, setting-related information (setting suggestion information) that can suggest the setting value set by the probability setting device 14 may be notified by the notification means (main display 8, sub-display 17, speaker 9) under the control of the sub-control device 20 based on control information from the main control device 10. For example, a predetermined character may be displayed from among multiple characters on the main display device 8 or sub-display 17, and the displayed character may be selected according to a selection probability that is preset in accordance with each setting value of the probability setting device 14, making it possible to predict the setting value to some extent from the displayed character.

(AT state)
The AT state is a game state in which it is easy to win medals, as push order navigation for the winning push order bell role is continuously performed during the period in which the game is in the AT state, as a notification of an operation mode that is advantageous to the player.
However, unlike the bonus state, the lottery control for the roles is the same as in the normal game state, so the lottery control for each role is executed in the same manner as in the normal game state.

During the AT state, a predetermined number of medals (e.g., 100 or 150 medals) awarded at the initial transition to the AT state is managed as the number of remaining medals required to continue the AT state, and this number is deducted each time a medal is paid out as the game is played, and the AT state continues until the number of remaining medals is depleted.
Furthermore, in a game during the AT state, for example, when a rare role is won, an add-on lottery is held with a predetermined probability in which a predetermined number of medals is added to the remaining number of medals, and if the add-on lottery is won, the number of remaining medals will increase, thereby extending the duration of the AT state.

For example, if a strong cherry role is won, either 50 or 100 medals will be added to the remaining medal count, and if a special replay role is won, an additional lottery will be held to add either 30 or 50 medals to the remaining medal count.
In addition, the trigger role for the additional lottery, the number of medals added, or the probability of winning the additional lottery can be any one of them, but it is preferable that the additional lottery that is more favorable to the player is performed for roles with relatively lower winning probabilities.
When there are no more medals remaining in the AT state, the AT state ends.

In the fifth embodiment, the condition for terminating the AT state is set to be satisfied based on the number of medals paid out, similar to the condition for terminating the bonus state, in order to increase the interest of the bonus state and various effects (e.g., continuation effects) during the AT state. However, the condition for terminating the AT state may also be set to be satisfied based on the number of medals (net increase in number) acquired by the player during the AT state.
In addition, a predetermined number of games (e.g., 30 games) may be awarded at the initial transition to the AT state, and the continuation of the AT state may be managed as the remaining number of games that can be continued, and the remaining number of games may be subtracted for each game, so that the AT state continues until there are no remaining games.

During the AT state, control information regarding the AT state is transmitted from the main control unit 10 to the sub-control unit 20, and various performance images are displayed on the main display 8 under the control of the sub-control unit 20.
As mentioned above, the bonus state and the AT state are basically indistinguishable (or difficult to distinguish), so even when transitioning to the AT state, the main display 8 displays the same effects as in the bonus state.

Although details will be described later, when a predetermined condition is met in the AT state, the sub-controller 20 may control the execution of a presentation that allows the player to recognize that the AT state is being entered.
In other words, the sub-control device 20, as a special effect control means, is capable of executing a second special effect that allows the player to recognize that a second special game state has occurred based on the occurrence of a second special game state (AT state).

・Transition process from AT state to bonus state (arrow f5 in FIG. 42)
During the AT state (second special gaming state), the main control device 10 performs a lottery for winning combinations, just as in the normal gaming state.
Therefore, even during the AT state, the selection of the bonus role is carried out in the same manner as in the normal game state, and if the bonus role is won, the right to transition to the bonus state is granted.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, in a game in which a bonus role and another role are both won, the main control device 10 performs priority stop control such that the role other than the bonus role is stopped preferentially.
In addition, if a bonus role is won during the AT state, the fact that the bonus role has been won is notified, and further, even in a game after the bonus role is won (bonus winning state), if the push order bell role is won, push order navigation is executed.

Therefore, when a bonus role is won during the AT state, there is no change in presentation from the state before the bonus role was won, and since other roles (such as the push order bell role) are frequently given priority in winning during the AT state, the player will play the game during the AT state without realizing that he or she has won the bonus role.
Then, based on the end of the AT state, a notification is given that a bonus role has been won (the right to transition to the bonus state has been acquired), and in the game after the end of the AT state, it becomes possible to immediately transition to the bonus state.
As described above, when a bonus role is won during the AT state, and during a game during the bonus state, a lottery for transition to the AT state is held again.

The notification of the winning of the bonus role may be performed in the final game of the AT state (including after the game ends), or in the game following the final game of the AT state.
Also, in a game during the AT state, if all roles other than the bonus role are non-winning, it is possible to stop the special symbol combination, but in this case, it is preferable to perform a performance that does not stop the special symbol combination.

For example, it is preferable to set a blank symbol (preferably a relatively conspicuous symbol) on a specific reel 4 that overlaps with the symbol ("7") that constitutes a special symbol combination and has a gap that makes it impossible to draw in, and to execute an effect that encourages a stopping operation aimed at this blank symbol when all roles other than the bonus role are non-winning roles in a game during the AT state in which a bonus role has been won.

However, in a game in which a bonus role has been won during the AT state, if all roles other than the bonus role are non-winning, the special symbol combination can be stopped, so when the special symbol combination stops, the game state will transition from the AT state to the bonus role at that point.

When a special symbol combination stops during a game in the AT state, the AT state being executed is temporarily interrupted and the game state is shifted to a bonus state, and when the bonus state ends, the game state is shifted to the AT state again.
In addition, when transitioning from the AT state to the bonus state, the number of remaining medals in the AT state is reserved at the time of transition to the bonus state, and when returning to the AT state again, the AT state will be resumed from the reserved number of remaining medals (arrow e5 in Figure 42).

However, if the game transitions to the bonus state during the AT state, unlike when the game transitions to the bonus state during normal gameplay (including after the AT state ends), the lottery process for transitioning to the AT state is not performed, and the bonus state ends when a predetermined number of medals are paid out, and the game returns to the AT state.

In addition, when a transition is made from the middle of an AT state to a bonus state, in place of a lottery to transition to the AT state, a lottery may be held in the game during the bonus state to add a predetermined number of medals (for example, 10 medals) to the number of remaining medals in the AT state.
However, in this case, it is preferable to arrange the lottery so that the player can receive a greater benefit when transitioning to the bonus state after the end of the AT state than when transitioning to the bonus state from the middle of the AT state.

・Transition process from AT state to normal gaming state (arrow d5 in FIG. 42)
In the AT state, if the condition for terminating the AT state is met, i.e., if there are no more medals remaining in the AT state, the game will transition to the normal game state after the AT state ends.
In addition, even if the right to transition to the bonus state is granted in a game during the AT state, if the conditions for ending the AT state are met, the game will transition to the normal game state once. In this case, however, the game will immediately transition to the bonus state when a special pattern combination stops during the normal game state.

When the AT state is changed to the normal game state, the winning probability state of the AT state is controlled to be the normal probability state. At this time, the winning probability state may be changed to the high probability state with a predetermined probability for each setting in the probability setting device 14.
In addition, when transitioning to a high probability state after the end of the AT state, there is a possibility that the aforementioned limiting control (limiter control) will be performed during the high probability state, but if limiting control is performed during the high probability state, the state will be transitioned to the normal probability state.

In addition, at the end of the AT state, an ending state is set for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds), during which the game progress is temporarily disabled, and after the ending state ends, the game transitions to the normal game state.
During the ending state, setting-related information that can suggest the setting value set by the probability setting device 14 is notified by the notification means under the control of the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20. For example, a predetermined image is displayed on the main display device 8 and the sub-display device 17, and a predetermined sound is output by the speaker 9.
As described above, the transition of the gaming state in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment is performed.

[AT state transition lottery control in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment]
Next, with reference to Figures 43 and 44, the AT state transition lottery control in the slot machine 1 in the fifth embodiment will be described.

As mentioned above, when a bonus role is won, or during a game in the bonus state, the main control unit 10 conducts a lottery to transition to the AT state, and if this transition lottery is won, the right to transition to the AT state is granted.
Below, the probability of each lottery result being obtained when the main control device 10 performs a lottery for transitioning to the AT state will be explained.

First, FIG. 43 shows the probability of each lottery result in the lottery for transition to the AT state when a bonus role is won.
In addition, when a bonus role is won, the main control device 10 performs a lottery for transition to the AT state by sampling a predetermined random number.
In addition, if a bonus role is won during the AT state, a similar transition lottery will be held.

As shown in Figure 43, in the AT state transition lottery when a bonus role is won, the AT state transition lottery is held so that there is a 90% probability of not winning the AT state, a 9% probability of winning the AT state with an initial number of remaining medals of 100, and a 1% probability of winning the AT state with an initial number of remaining medals of 150.
When the AT state is selected by the transition lottery, the right to transition to the AT state is granted from the time the bonus role is selected, and the corresponding number of remaining medals is stored and held.

As described above, when a bonus role is won, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to transition to the AT state. This creates the possibility that the right to transition to the AT state may be granted before the transition to the bonus state occurs, thereby increasing the player's sense of anticipation.
In addition, since the AT state transition lottery can generate AT states with different numbers of remaining medals initially awarded, it becomes possible to generate a wider variety of AT states, thereby increasing the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, the lottery for transition to the AT state when a bonus role is won is also executed when a bonus role is won in a game during the AT state. Therefore, if the lottery for transition to the AT state is won at this time, it is determined that the player will transition to the bonus state after the AT state ends, and will then transition again to the AT state after the bonus state ends.
Although the number of remaining medals awarded initially is set to the number of medals to be paid out during the AT state, it may also be set to the number of medals the player acquires during the AT state (net increase in medals).

Next, Figure 44 shows the probability of each lottery result in the AT state transition lottery and the additional lottery when each game is played during the bonus state.
In addition, the main control device 10 performs each lottery by sampling a predetermined random number when a game in which the lottery is performed is executed.

First, FIG. 44(a) shows the lottery result when the right to transition to the AT state has not yet been granted.
As shown in Figure 44 (a), if a role other than a rare role is won in a game during the bonus state, a lottery is held to transition to the AT state with a 95% probability of not winning the AT state, a 4% probability of winning the AT state with an initial number of remaining medals of 100, and a 1% probability of winning the AT state with an initial number of remaining medals of 150.

In addition, if a rare role is won in a game during the bonus state, a lottery for transition to the AT state is held so that there is a 60% probability of not winning the AT state, a 30% probability of winning the AT state with an initial number of remaining medals of 100, and a 10% probability of winning the AT state with an initial number of remaining medals of 150.
If the player wins the AT state through the transition lottery, the player is granted the right to transition to the AT state when the game is played during the bonus state, and the corresponding number of remaining medals is stored.

Next, Figure 44 (b) shows the result of an additional lottery in a game in the bonus state after the right to transition to the AT state has already been granted, i.e., when a bonus role is won or in a game in the bonus state, the result of an additional lottery in a game in the bonus state after the lottery for transitioning to the AT state has already been won.
In the fifth embodiment, if the right to transition to the AT state has already been granted, the right to transition to the AT state is not granted, and instead an additional lottery is held to add a predetermined number of medals to the remaining number of medals in the AT state that will occur subsequently.

As shown in FIG. 44(b), if a role other than a rare role is won in a game during a bonus state in which the right to transition to the AT state has already been granted, an additional lottery will be held with a 93% probability of not winning, a 5% probability of winning to add 10 medals to the number of remaining medals, and a 2% probability of winning to add 20 medals to the number of remaining medals.

In addition, if a rare role is won in a game during a bonus state in which the right to transition to the AT state has already been granted, an additional lottery will be held with a 20% probability of not winning, a 50% probability of winning to add 10 medals to the remaining medal count, and a 30% probability of winning to add 20 medals to the remaining medal count.
If the player wins the additional medal lottery, the number of remaining medals increased by the number of additional medals will be stored.

As described above, since a lottery for transition to the AT state is held in a game during the bonus state, there is a possibility that the right to transition to the AT state will be granted in each game during the bonus state, which makes it possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation.
In addition, if a rare role is won, the lottery for transition to the AT state will be more advantageous to the player than if a role other than a rare role is won.
Therefore, when a rare combination is won in a game during the bonus state, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, even in games during the bonus state after the right to transition to the AT state has been granted, a lottery is held to add a specified number of medals to the remaining medal count. For example, if a rare combination is won, this reduces the player's dissatisfaction due to the fact that a lottery to transition to the AT state is not held, and it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, if a bonus role is won in a game during the AT state, but the bonus state occurs during the AT state without waiting for the AT state to end, it is preferable that a lottery for transitioning to the AT state is not held in the game during the bonus state, and instead an additional lottery as shown in Figure 44 (b) is held.
Therefore, in this case, if a bonus role is won in a game during the AT state, it is more advantageous for the player to transition to the bonus state after the AT state ends.

The probability of each lottery result may be other than those mentioned above as long as it can form the above-mentioned trend.
Furthermore, the number of remaining medals that determines the duration of the AT state may be other than the above, or three or more options may be provided.
In addition, the number of medals added may be other than those mentioned above, or three or more options may be provided.
In addition, the lottery results may be changed depending on the type of rare role that is won. For example, when a rare role with a relatively low probability of winning (such as a strong cherry role) is won, a lottery may be held to derive a lottery result that is more advantageous to the player.
As described above, the lottery control for transition to the AT state in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment is performed.

[Control when winning the lottery for transition to the AT state during the bonus state in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment]
Next, referring to Figures 45 to 47, the control by the main control unit 10 and the display control (display content) by the sub-control unit 20 in the gaming machine (slot machine 1) of this fifth embodiment when the AT state transition lottery is won during the bonus state will be described.

First, referring to the timing chart in Figure 45, we will explain the transition of the game state according to the progress of the game and the display content (presentation) on the main display 8 when the lottery for transition to the AT state is won during the bonus state.
As shown in FIG. 45, when a bonus role is won during a game in the normal game state (timing t50), the right to transition to the bonus state is granted, and in the subsequent games, stopping control of reel 4, which can stop a special symbol combination, is performed.
When a bonus role is won, a lottery for transition to the AT state is held, but in the figure, the transition lottery at this time is not won.

In addition, in a game after a bonus combination is won in the normal gaming state, an instruction display prompting the player to stop a special symbol combination is executed on the main display 8.
Then, when the player, having confirmed the above-mentioned instruction display, performs an appropriate operation to stop the special symbol combination, the special symbol combination ("7, 7, 7") is stopped on the pay line of reel 4 (timing t51).

When a special symbol combination stops, the game state is changed from a normal game state to a bonus state, and the presentation on the main display 8 etc. is changed from a presentation corresponding to the normal game state to a presentation corresponding to the bonus state (first special presentation).
In addition, when the push order bell role is won in each game due to the transition to the bonus state, push order navigation is executed on the main display 8.
In addition, the push order navigation may be executed even if the common bell role is won at this time.

When the gaming state transitions to a bonus state, a lottery for transition to an AT state is held in a game during the bonus state.
Then, in a game during the bonus state, if the player wins the lottery for transitioning to the AT state (timing t52), the right to transition to the AT state is granted.
Therefore, from then on, the game will be played in the bonus state with the right to transition to the AT state granted.

Also, even if the transition lottery to the AT state is won, the presentation on the main display 8 will not change, and the presentation corresponding to the bonus state (first special presentation) will continue to be executed.
Then, during the bonus state, when a game (final game) in which the condition for terminating the bonus state is met is executed (timing t53), the bonus state ends at the end of that game.
If the right to transition to the AT state has been granted at this time, the presentation notifying the end of the bonus state will not be executed and the next game can be started.

Then, when the next game starts after the bonus state ends (timing t54), the gaming state transitions to the AT state.
Furthermore, even if the gaming state is changed from the bonus state to the AT state, the main display 8 will continue to execute the effect (first special effect) corresponding to the bonus state.
Therefore, even if the gaming state is shifted from the bonus state to the AT state, the player will proceed with the game without noticing this.

Then, when a game is executed during the AT state in which the condition for terminating the AT state is met (timing t55), the AT state ends at the end of that game.
In addition, upon the end of the AT state, the game state is changed from the AT state to the normal game state, and the presentation on the main display 8, etc. is changed from the presentation corresponding to the AT state (second special presentation) to the presentation corresponding to the normal game state.
Furthermore, by transitioning to the normal game state, even if the push order bell role is won in each game, the push order navigation on the main display 8 will no longer be executed.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, if a bonus role is won or if the player wins the lottery for transitioning to the AT state during a game in the bonus state, the main control device 10 generates the AT state after the bonus state ends.

In other words, the main control device 10, as a special game state control means, is equipped with a second special game state control means that is capable of generating a second special game state (AT state) after the end of the first special game state when a second special condition is established (winning the AT state transition lottery) in connection with the occurrence of the first special game state (bonus state).
Therefore, the AT state occurs following the bonus state, which can increase the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, if an AT state is generated after the bonus state ends, the presentation corresponding to the bonus state on the main display 8 that had been executed up until that point will continue to be executed even in the AT state.

In other words, the sub-controller 20, as a special effect control means, enables the first special effect (effect corresponding to the bonus state) to be continuously executed in the second special game state when the second special game state (AT state) is generated by the second special game state control means (main controller 10).
Therefore, even if the game state is changed from the bonus state to the AT state, the game content can be realized as if the bonus state had been extended without the player being aware of this, and it is possible to increase interest by providing unprecedented and novel game content.

Note that the illustration shows a case where the right to transition to the AT state is granted in a game during a bonus state, but a similar effect is also executed when the right to transition to the AT state is granted when a bonus role is won.
In addition, the timing of the lottery for transition to the AT state may be other than the above, for example, the time when a special pattern combination stops, the start of the first game in the bonus state, or the end of the final game in the bonus state.

Next, various effects during the bonus state in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
Figure 46 shows the presentation image on the main display 8 when an effect corresponding to the bonus state (first special effect) is executed, and shows the presentation image when transitioning from the bonus state to the AT state and when the bonus state ends.

The main control unit 10 transmits control information related to the bonus state, such as information capable of identifying the start and end of the bonus state, and information capable of identifying whether or not there is a right to transition to the AT state, to the sub-control unit 20, and based on the received control information, the sub-control unit 20 executes an effect corresponding to the bonus state (first special effect) by displaying various effect images related to the bonus state on the main display 8.
In response to the execution of a performance corresponding to the bonus state on the main display 8, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 9, and a predetermined decorative light is output from the lamp 11.

First, as shown in FIG. 46(a), during the bonus state, a bonus state image 60a indicating that the bonus state is in effect is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8, and a presentation corresponding to the bonus state (first special presentation) is executed.
The bonus state image 60a can be any image that allows the player to recognize that he or she is in the bonus state and that enhances the player's interest during the bonus state. For example, an introductory image (video) of the characters that appear may be displayed.

Furthermore, in this fifth embodiment, a continuation presentation is executed at predetermined intervals, such as when the number of medals paid out during the bonus state reaches 50, 100, 150, etc., to notify the player as to whether or not the bonus state will continue.
Therefore, for example, during the execution of a game in which the number of medals paid out during the bonus state is 50, a continuation presentation image 61a consisting of text information of "Continuation Chance", as shown in Figure 46 (b), is displayed at the bottom of the bonus state image 60a, and the continuation presentation is executed.

If the bonus state has not yet ended and will continue until the next game, as shown in FIG. 46(c), a continuation confirmation image 61b consisting of the text information "Continuation Confirmed" is displayed below the bonus state image 60a at the end of the game, notifying the player that the bonus state will continue.

On the other hand, when the bonus state ends, as shown in FIG. 46(d), a bonus end image 61c consisting of the text information "BONUS ENDED" at the end of the game, a bonus game count image 61d indicating the number of games played during the bonus state (in the figure, "40G"), and a medal payout number image 61e indicating the number of medals paid out during the bonus state (in the figure, "120 medals") are displayed in the center of the screen of the main display 8.
At this time, the number of medals actually acquired by the player (net increase in medals) may be displayed.

As mentioned above, during the bonus state, the number of medals paid out or the number of games played during the bonus state are not displayed, so for players who do not fully understand how far into the bonus state they have progressed at the current point, the continuation presentation described above will notify them at specified game intervals whether the bonus state will continue or not.
In addition, the execution of the continuation effect also prevents the bonus state from ending suddenly, which would reduce the interest of the bonus state.

Also, when transitioning to the AT state immediately after the end of the bonus state, in a game in which the number of medals paid out during the bonus state is the upper limit of 150, a continuation effect similar to that described above is executed, and after the final game in the bonus state is completed, a continuation confirmation image 61b as shown in Figure 46 (c) is displayed at the bottom of the bonus state image 60a, to notify the player that the bonus state will continue.
Then, even in the game after the gaming state has shifted to the AT state, the bonus state image 60a continues to be displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8.
In this case, however, although the continuation of the bonus state is notified, the gaming state will actually transition to the AT state from the next game.

In other words, the continuation effect that is executed when the number of medals paid out during the bonus state reaches, for example, 50 or 100, is executed while the bonus state continues, whereas the continuation effect that is executed when the number of medals paid out reaches 150 is executed when the game state transitions from the bonus state to the AT state. In this way, when the bonus state ends, an effect similar to the continuation effect during the bonus state is executed, making it unclear that the game state has transitioned from the bonus state to the AT state.

In addition, even after the transition to the AT state, just as during the bonus state, a continuation presentation is executed to notify whether the bonus state (actually the AT state) will continue or not, with the number of medals paid out during the AT state being, for example, 50, 100, 150, etc., at payout intervals of 50 medals.
Therefore, even after the transition from the bonus state to the AT state, the continuation effect will continue to be executed at a specified game interval, and depending on whether the continuation effect is executed or not and the interval at which it is executed, it becomes unclear whether the state is a bonus state or an AT state at that point in time.

It is also possible to generate multiple bonus states with different ending conditions, and to provide a bonus state that ends when the number of medals paid out exceeds, for example, 50 or 100, and then execute a continuation presentation similar to that described above.
In this way, each branching point at which the bonus state may end corresponds to the time at which the continuation performance is executed, thereby making the continuation performance more entertaining.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, a continuation effect is executed in the middle of a bonus state to notify the player that the bonus state will continue, and the same continuation effect is also executed when transitioning from the bonus state to the AT state.

In other words, the sub-controller 20, which serves as a special effect control means, enables the execution of a continuation effect that can notify the player that the first special game state (bonus state) will continue when the second special game state (AT state) is generated by the second special game state control means (main controller 10).
Therefore, even when the game state changes from a bonus state to an AT state, it is possible to execute the effects during that time without any sense of incongruity, and it is possible to allow the player to play the game while making him or her recognize that the bonus state has continued.

Furthermore, if the game transitions to the AT state immediately after the bonus state ends, the same effects that were executed during the bonus state will be executed during the AT state.
In other words, the sub-controller 20, as a special effect control means, enables the first special effect (effect corresponding to the bonus state) to be continuously executed in the second special game state when the second special game state (AT state) is generated by the second special game state control means (main controller 10).
Therefore, even after the transition from the bonus state to the AT state, the player will recognize that the bonus state has continued and will continue to play the game, making it possible to increase the interest of the game by implementing an unprecedented and innovative gameplay.

Incidentally, by displaying the bonus state image 60a on the main display 8, an effect corresponding to the bonus state as the first special effect is executed; however, any effect image may be displayed during the first special effect as long as it allows the player to recognize that he is in a bonus state and increases the interest during the bonus state; the first special effect may be executed by displaying a still image, or the first special effect may be executed by displaying a video.
In addition, although the first special performance is executed on the main display device 8, it may be executed on both the main display device 8 and the sub-display device 17, or it may be executed on the sub-display device 17 alone.

Next, referring to FIG. 47, we will explain the effects during the AT state in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment.

As mentioned above, if the AT state is entered immediately after the bonus state, the main display 8 will continue to display the effect corresponding to the bonus state (first special effect). However, if the AT state continues for a relatively long period of time due to an additional lottery or the like, many players will notice that the bonus state has already ended and they have entered the AT state.
Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, if the AT state that occurs immediately after the bonus state continues for a relatively long period of time, the presentation corresponding to the bonus state being executed on the main display 8 (first special presentation) is changed to a presentation corresponding to the AT state (second special presentation).

FIG. 47 shows an effect image on the main display 8 during the AT state, which is an effect image when the duration of the AT state exceeds a predetermined period.
First, as shown in FIG. 47(a), if the AT state immediately following the bonus state is within a specified period, as described above, a bonus state image 60a indicating that the bonus state is in effect is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8, and an effect corresponding to the bonus state (first special effect) is executed.

In addition, when the number of medals paid out during the AT state is, for example, 50, 100, 150, etc., at payout intervals of 50, a continuation effect image 61a is displayed below the bonus state image 60a in the same manner as described above, and a continuation effect is executed to notify whether the bonus state (actually the AT state) will continue or not.

In addition, the continuation of the AT state is also managed based on the number of medals paid out, just like the bonus state, so even during the AT state, each branching point where the AT state may end corresponds to the time when the continuation performance is executed.
In other words, if the continuation of the AT state were managed based on the number of medals (net increase in number) acquired by the player, there would be a high possibility that the AT state would end at a point outside the periodic continuation presentation that has been continuously executed since the bonus state, and there would be a risk that the player would be aware in advance that the AT state would end when the continuation presentation was executed.

If the AT state has not yet ended and will continue until the next game, a continuation confirmation image 61b will be displayed at the bottom of the screen at the end of the game, as shown in Figure 47 (b), to notify the player that the bonus state (actually the AT state) will continue.
Also, a bonus state image 60a is displayed on the main part of the screen of the main display 8.

However, when the continuation effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, the third time at the point where 150 coins are reached), an AT state image 60b is displayed in place of the bonus state image 60a, as shown in the figure, so that the player can recognize that the player is in the AT state.
In other words, if the AT state continues for a relatively long period of time, the bonus state image 60a is not displayed and the AT state image 60b is displayed, thereby changing the presentation corresponding to the bonus state being executed on the main display 8 (first special presentation) to the presentation corresponding to the AT state (second special presentation).

In addition, a remaining medal count image 62a (in the figure, "100 medals") indicating the number of medals remaining in the AT state is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen of the main display 8, and an executed game count image 62b (in the figure, "100G") indicating the total number of executed games in the bonus state and the AT state is displayed in the right corner of the screen of the main display 8.
Therefore, if the AT state continues for a relatively long period of time, the fact that the state is an AT state will be clearly notified, and the number of remaining medals and the number of games that have been played in the special game state (bonus state and AT state) at that time will be accurately notified.
In subsequent games, the AT state image 60b continues to be displayed, and the remaining medal number image 62a and the number of games played image 62b are updated and displayed based on the progress of the game and the lottery results of the winning combination.

On the other hand, when the AT state ends, as shown in FIG. 47(c), a bonus end image 61c consisting of the text information "BONUS END" at the end of the game, a bonus game count image 61d (shown as "100G") indicating the number of games played during the bonus state and the AT state, and a medal payout number image 61e (shown as "250 medals") indicating the number of medals paid out during the bonus state and the AT state are displayed in the center of the screen of the main display 8, thereby notifying the game result during the current special game state.
In addition, the number of games in which an AT state other than the bonus state continued, or the number of medals paid out during the AT state may be displayed.
Also, the number of medals actually acquired by the player (net increase in medals) may be displayed.

In this way, during the AT state immediately following the bonus state, the number of medals paid out and the number of games played during the bonus state are not displayed, just as during the bonus state. Therefore, for a player who does not fully understand how far into the bonus state the player has progressed at the current point in time, the execution of the continuation presentation described above will notify at predetermined intervals whether the bonus state (actually the AT state) will continue or not.
In addition, it is possible to prevent the special game state from ending suddenly due to the execution of the continuation presentation, which would reduce the interest of the special game state.

Furthermore, in this fifth embodiment, as described above, a lottery for adding to the number of remaining medals in the AT state is held in a game during the AT state, so at the time of this lottery, it is necessary to execute an add-on performance to notify the player that the add-on lottery has been held and the number of medals that will be added.
On the other hand, since the conditions for ending the bonus state cannot be changed, no additional draws are held for the number of remaining medals in the bonus state.

Therefore, in a game during an AT state in which the first special effect is being performed, if an additional lottery is held, the additional effect will not be performed, and if the number of medals is added as a result of winning the additional lottery, the number of added medals will not be announced, but will simply be added to the number of remaining medals in the AT state.
Then, when the bonus end image 61c is displayed in this state, it means that there are games remaining equal to the number of unreported added medals, so in the next game after the bonus end image 61c is displayed, an effect is executed in which the number of remaining medals is added (the so-called post-addition effect), and the special game state continues again.
In this case, since the player will notice that the game is moving to the AT state due to the addition of the number of medals, it is preferable to execute a presentation corresponding to the AT state (second special presentation) in the subsequent games.

On the other hand, in a game after the second special effect has been started during the AT state, if an additional draw is conducted, for example, an additional draw corresponding to the additional draw is conducted on the main display 8, and if the number of medals is increased as a result of winning the additional draw, the number of medals added will be added to and displayed in the remaining medal count image 62a.
Furthermore, in a game in which the first special effect is being played during the AT state, if an additional lottery is won and the effect is changed to the second special effect in a subsequent game, the remaining medal number image 62a including the number of additional medals will be displayed at the time when the remaining medal number image 62a appears.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, when the AT state is entered immediately after the bonus state, if the continuation effect executed in the AT state reaches a predetermined number of times (e.g., three times), i.e., if the number of medals paid out during the AT state reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 150 medals), the effect corresponding to the bonus state is changed to the effect corresponding to the AT state.

In other words, the sub-controller 20, as a special effect control means, enables switching from the first special effect (effect corresponding to the bonus state) to the second special effect (effect corresponding to the AT state) when the second special game state (AT state) is generated by the second special game state control means (main controller 10) and the duration of the second special game state exceeds a predetermined period (when the continuation effect has been executed three times).
Therefore, if the AT state continues for a long period of time, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the game state at that time is the AT state, and it is possible to prevent players who are already aware that they are in the AT state from becoming distrustful.

In addition, in a game after the first special effect has been changed to the second special effect, if an additional lottery is held, an additional effect corresponding to the additional lottery is executed, for example, on the main display device 8.
In other words, the sub-controller 20, which serves as a special effect control means, enables the execution of an effect (additional effect) corresponding to a specific lottery that can grant a player a specified benefit (additional number of medals) when a specific lottery is held in a game after the first special effect is switched to the second special effect because the duration of the second special game state (AT state) exceeds a specified period of time.

Therefore, if the AT state continues for a long period of time, the fact that it is in the AT state will be notified, making it possible to execute additional effects that are not executed during the bonus state without any problems, thereby making it possible to increase the excitement of the game and the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, the conditions for changing from the first special effect to the second special effect may be other than those described above, for example, when the number of games played after transitioning to the AT state reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 100 times).
In addition, when the number of remaining medals becomes a predetermined number (for example, 300 medals) or more by the additional lottery during the AT state, the first special effect may be changed to the second special effect. In other words, in this case, since it is determined in advance that the AT state will continue for a long period of time, the effect will be changed to the second special effect even if the AT state does not continue for a long period of time.

In addition, the continuation of the AT state may be managed based on the number of medals (net increase in number of medals) acquired by the player.In this case, during the execution of the first special effect after the transition to the AT state, it is preferable to execute the continuation effect when the number of medals acquired by the player (net increase in number of medals) reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 50, 100, etc.).
As described above, control is performed when the lottery for transitioning to the AT state is won during the bonus state in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment.

[Control when a bonus role is won during the AT state in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment]
Next, with reference to Figures 48 to 50, a control when a bonus role is won during the AT state in the gaming machine (slot machine 1) of the fifth embodiment will be described.

First, referring to Figure 48, we will explain the control that is performed when a bonus role is won in a game during an AT state in which a performance corresponding to a bonus state (first special performance) is being executed in a gaming machine (slot machine 1) according to the fifth embodiment.

The timing chart in Figure 48 shows the transition of the game state according to the progress of the game when a bonus role is won in a game during the AT state in which the first special effect is being executed, and the transition of the display content (effect) on the main display 8.
As shown in FIG. 48, when a special symbol combination stops during a game in a normal gaming state (timing t56), the gaming state is changed from the normal gaming state to a bonus state, and the presentation on the main display 8 etc. is changed from the presentation during the normal gaming state to the presentation during the bonus state (first special presentation).
In addition, when the push order bell role is won in each game due to the transition to the bonus state, push order navigation is executed on the main display 8.

Then, if the player wins the lottery for transitioning to the AT state in a game during the bonus state, the game state will transition from the bonus state to the AT state from the game following the final game of the bonus state (timing t57).
Furthermore, even if the game state is changed from a bonus state to an AT state through control by the sub-controller 20 based on the reception of control information from the main control unit 10, the main display 8 will continue to execute the presentation corresponding to the bonus state.
Also, even if the AT state is entered, if the push order bell role is won in each game, push order navigation is executed on the main display 8, just as in the bonus state.
Therefore, even if the gaming state is shifted from the bonus state to the AT state, the player will proceed with the game without noticing this.

In addition, when the gaming state is shifted to the AT state, a lottery for a bonus role is also held in the game during the AT state.
When a bonus role is won in a game during the AT state, the state of winning the bonus role (bonus winning state) is maintained until a special symbol combination (special symbol mode) stops.

In the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, as described above, in a game during a bonus winning state in the AT state, when a bonus role and another role are won at the same time, the main control unit 10 performs priority stop control such that the role other than the bonus role is stopped preferentially.
In addition, due to control by the sub-controller 20 based on receiving control information from the main controller 10, in a game during a bonus winning state in the AT state, the fact that a bonus role has been won is notified, and the effects (first special effects) and push order navigation during the bonus state (actually the AT state) continue to be executed.

Therefore, even if a bonus role is won in a game during the AT state, the player will play the game during the AT state without realizing that he or she has won the bonus role, and as a result, the possibility of transitioning to the bonus state (the special symbol combination stopping) until the AT state ends is extremely low, so the right to transition to the bonus state is held until the AT state ends.

Then, when the game that ends the AT state ends and the game state transitions to the normal game state (timing t59), the sub-controller 20, based on the control information received from the main controller 10, notifies the player that a bonus combination has been won, and an instruction display to stop the special symbol combination is executed on the main display 8 together with a display corresponding to the normal game state.

The instruction display for stopping the special symbol combination continues to be executed until the special symbol combination is stopped, and when the special symbol combination is stopped, the game state transitions from the game to a bonus state, and the display on the main display 8 etc. is changed from a display corresponding to the normal game state to a display corresponding to the bonus state.
In addition, the push order navigation that was not performed due to the end of the AT state will be resumed by the transition to the bonus state.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, during the AT state immediately following the bonus state, a presentation corresponding to the bonus state is executed, so that a game mode can be created in which the same special game state continues even after changing to the AT state.

In addition, if a bonus role is won in a game during the AT state in which the first special performance is being executed, various controls are implemented to prevent the special symbol combination from stopping, making it extremely unlikely that the game will transition to the bonus state (the special symbol combination will stop) until the AT state ends, and as a result, the right to transition to the bonus state is held until the AT state ends.

In other words, the main control device 10, as a special game state control means, is able to retain the right to generate the first special game state (right to transition to the bonus state) until the second special game state ends when the first special condition is met (a bonus role is won) during the second special game state (AT state).
Therefore, it is possible to prevent an awkward game from being played, such as a bonus state occurring again during a bonus state (actually an AT state).

In addition, if the right to transition to the bonus state is granted at the time the AT state ends, an instruction to stop the special symbol combination is executed on the main display 8, and it becomes possible to transition to the bonus state immediately after the AT state ends.

In other words, the sub-controller 20 as a special effect control means is equipped with a post-termination instruction effect control means capable of executing an instruction effect that instructs the derivation of a special pattern mode (special pattern combination) if the right to generate the first special game state (right to transition to the bonus state) is held when the second special game state (AT state) ends.
Therefore, it is possible to simulate a game mode in which a so-called consecutive bonus state (or one game consecutive) occurs, in which a bonus state occurs again immediately after the end of the AT state that is presented as a bonus state, thereby making it possible to greatly increase the player's sense of expectation.

Furthermore, after the transition to the bonus state again, game control and presentation control during the bonus state, including the lottery for transition to the AT state, are carried out in the same manner as described above, and control related to the bonus state and the AT state is repeatedly executed.
In addition, if a bonus role is won during the AT state, a lottery for transition to the AT state will be held as described above.

During or after the final game of the AT state in which the first special effect is being executed, a display showing whether or not the right to transition to the bonus state has been granted may be executed on the main display 8, and if the right to transition to the bonus state has been granted, the result of the display may be to notify that the right to transition to the bonus state has been granted, and if the right to transition to the bonus state has not been granted, the result of the display may be to notify that the right to transition to the bonus state has not been granted.
In addition, the above-mentioned effects may be executed as continuous effects over the time period during which a predetermined number of games are executed just before the end of the AT state.

Next, referring to Figures 49 and 50, we will explain the control when a bonus role and a special replay role are won in a game during an AT state in which a performance corresponding to the AT state (second special performance) is being executed in the gaming machine (slot machine 1) of this fifth embodiment.

First, referring to Figure 49, we will explain what happens when you win a bonus role during the AT state in which the second special performance is taking place.

As mentioned above, when the duration of the AT state exceeds a predetermined period (for example, when the number of medals paid out exceeds 150), for example, on the main display 8, the effect corresponding to the bonus state that had been executed up until that point (first special effect) will be changed to an effect corresponding to the AT state (second special effect).
In addition, during a game in the normal game state, a lottery for transition to the AT state is also held, so even if this transition lottery is won and the game transitions directly from the normal game state to the AT state, the second special performance will be executed from the beginning of the AT state.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, if a bonus role is won during the AT state in which the first special performance is being performed, the right to transition to the bonus state is retained until the AT state ends, but if a bonus role is won during the AT state in which the second special performance is being performed, the bonus state can be transitioned from that point on.

Therefore, if a bonus combination is won during the AT state in which the second special effect is being performed, a command to stop the special symbol combination from that game is executed by the main display device 8, etc., making it possible to transition to the bonus state in the middle of the AT state without waiting for the end of the AT state.

FIG. 49 shows a presentation image on the main display 8 when a bonus role is won during the AT state in which the second special presentation is being performed.
In addition, various performance images on the main display 8 are displayed by the sub-controller 20 based on the reception of control information from the main controller 10.

First, as shown in FIG. 49(a), if the duration of the AT state immediately after the bonus state exceeds a predetermined period, or if there is a direct transition from the normal game state to the AT state, an AT state image 60b indicating that the AT state is in progress is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8, and an effect corresponding to the AT state (second special effect) is executed.
In addition, a remaining medal count image 62a (in the figure, "100 medals") indicating the number of medals remaining in the AT state is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen of the main display 8, and an executed game count image 62b (in the figure, "100G") indicating the total number of executed games in the bonus state and the AT state is displayed in the right corner of the screen of the main display 8.

Then, as shown in FIG. 49(b), when a bonus role is won in a game during the AT state in which the second special effect is being executed, the sub-controller 20, based on the control information received from the main controller 10, controls the lower part of the AT state image 60b on the screen of the main display 8 to display, as special operation information, a pattern instruction image 52a consisting of text information "Aim for 7" which prompts the player to stop a special pattern combination (special pattern form "7-7-7"), and an operation instruction image 52b which indicates that the stopping operation sequence (stopping direction) of the reel 4 should be reversed ("5c → 5b → 5a"), side by side in the left-right direction, and an instruction effect for stopping the special pattern combination is executed.
In the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the bonus role can be won alone, so that in a game in which the bonus role is won, a special symbol combination can be stopped on the reel 4, and an instruction performance will be executed during that game.

In addition, the main control unit 10 manages the duration of the AT state, etc., and is therefore able to grasp whether the presentation during the AT state on the main display 8, etc. is either the first special presentation or the second special presentation. When the second special presentation is being performed, at the point in time when a bonus role is won, control information is transmitted to the sub-control unit 20 for executing an instruction presentation to stop the special pattern combination.
In addition, if the stop operation is appropriate, the special symbol combination will stop regardless of the stop operation sequence, but in the above instruction performance, the operation instruction image 52b is displayed to notify (instruct) the player to reverse the stop operation sequence of the reel 4 ("5c → 5b → 5a"). This is to make it impossible to distinguish from the winning of the special replay role described later.

As shown in FIG. 49(c), when the player performs the stop operation on reel 4 according to the above-mentioned instruction, a special symbol combination in which 7 symbols 54a are lined up on the pay line (middle line) of each reel 4 will stop.

In addition, when a special pattern combination stops on the reel 4, an addition result image 62 including numerical information of "+150 medals" is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the main display 8 to notify the player that medals have been added to the number of remaining medals in the AT state, and an addition effect (bonus awarding effect) is executed.
At this time, the number of medals notified by the added-on result image 62 is the number of medals that determines the duration of the bonus state.

Then, when the special symbol combination stops, the game state is changed from the AT state to the bonus state in the subsequent games.
In other words, the gaming state is changed to the bonus state in the middle of the AT state.
In addition, there are cases where the special symbol combination cannot be stopped even if the instruction performance is performed, in which case the instruction performance will continue to be performed in the following games. However, various information related to the execution of the game during this time is irrelevant to the continuation management of the AT state.

In the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, if the game state is changed to the bonus state during the AT state in which an effect corresponding to the AT state (second special effect) is being executed, the second special effect on the main display 8 continues to be executed.
Therefore, although not shown in the figure, even in games after the change to the bonus state, the game in the bonus state is executed with the AT state image 60b, the remaining medal number image 62a, and the number of games played image 62b continuing to be displayed on the main display 8, and the remaining medal number image 62a and the number of games played image 62b are updated and displayed according to the progress of the game and the results of the lottery.

It should be noted that the remaining medal number image 62a will be displayed with the number of medals displayed in the added result image 62 added at the start of the bonus state.
However, since the continuation management of the bonus state and the AT state is carried out separately, the number of remaining medals displayed in the remaining medal number image 62a indicates the possible continuation period of a pseudo AT state, which is the sum of the number of remaining medals in each of the bonus state and the AT state.

In other words, if the game state is changed to the bonus state during the AT state while the second special effect is being executed, the second special effect will continue to be executed during the bonus state, and because a special symbol combination has stopped during the game in the AT state, a specified number of medals (150 medals, which dictate the duration of the bonus state) will be added to the number of medals remaining in the AT state, and an effect will be executed as if the possible duration of the AT state had been extended.

When the bonus state ends, the game state is changed from the bonus state to the AT state, and the AT state that was in effect when the transition to the bonus state ended is restored.
Furthermore, even if the AT state is restored, the AT state image 60b, the remaining medal count image 62a, and the number of games played image 62b on the main display 8 continue to be displayed, the game in the AT state is played again, and the remaining medal count image 62a and the number of games played image 62b are updated and displayed according to the progress of the game and the results of the lottery.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, when a bonus role is won in a game during the AT state in which the second special effect is being executed, an instruction effect is executed to stop the special pattern combination at that time (during the AT state).
In other words, the sub-control device 20, which serves as a special effect control means, is equipped with an intermediate instruction effect control means that is capable of executing an instruction effect that instructs the derivation of a special pattern mode (special pattern combination) during the second special game state (AT state) when the first special condition is met (a bonus role is won) during the second special game state.

Furthermore, when a special symbol combination stops on reel 4 as a result of the execution of the above-mentioned instruction effect, a bonus state is generated, and an additional effect is executed to notify that the duration of the AT state will be extended by the duration of this bonus state.
In other words, the sub-control device 20, which serves as a special effect control means, is equipped with a bonus-granting effect control means capable of executing a bonus-granting effect (add-on effect) that can notify the player that a bonus related to the extension of the duration of the second special game state has been granted based on the derivation of a special pattern form during the second special game state.

Therefore, when a bonus role is won in a game during an AT state in which the second special effect is being executed, an effect is executed as if the duration of the AT state had been extended, thereby making it possible to increase the player's sense of expectation.
Furthermore, when a bonus role is won in a game during the AT state, the presentation related to the bonus state is changed depending on the presentation state at that time (first special presentation or second special presentation), and the manner in which the game state progresses is changed, thereby making it possible to further diversify the game and increase its entertainment value.

It is possible to transition to the bonus state multiple times during one AT state, but even in this case, the same instruction effects and additional effects as above will be executed when each bonus role is won.

Next, referring to Figure 50, we will explain what happens when you win a special replay during the AT state when the effect corresponding to the AT state (second special effect) is being performed.

In the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, when a rare role is won in a game during the AT state, an additional lottery is held to add a predetermined number of medals to the number of remaining medals in the AT state.
The above rare roles include special replay roles, so if you win a special replay role, an additional lottery will be held.

In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, "REPLAY REPLAY REPLAY", "REPLAY BELL BELL" and "BELL REPLAY BELL" are set as symbol combinations corresponding to the replay role.
Reel 4 is controlled to stop so that when a normal replay role (a replay role other than a rare role) is won, "Replay Replay Replay" can be stopped on the valid line, when a chance replay role (rare role) is won, "Replay Bell Bell" can be stopped on the valid line, and when a special replay role (rare role) is won, "Replay Replay Replay" or "Bell Replay Bell" can be stopped on the valid line.

In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, in a game in which a special replay role is won, if the right reel 4c is stopped first (if the reel 4 is stopped by a special operation such as a so-called reverse push or irregular push), the symbol combination "Bell Replay Bell" stops on the winning line, and if any other reel 4 is stopped first, the reel 4 stopping control is performed so that the symbol combination "Replay Replay Replay" stops on the winning line, just as when a normal replay role is won.

In addition, in a game in which a special replay role is won, if the additional lottery is won, a reverse push instruction display is executed on the main display 8, and if the additional lottery is not won, the reverse push instruction display on the main display 8 is not executed.

Figure 50 shows a presentation image on the main display 8 when a special replay role is won during the AT state in which the second special presentation is being performed.
In addition, various performance images on the main display 8 are displayed by the sub-controller 20 based on the reception of control information from the main controller 10.

First, as shown in FIG. 50(a), if the duration of the AT state immediately after the bonus state exceeds a predetermined period, or if there is a direct transition from the normal game state to the AT state, an AT state image 60b indicating that the AT state is in progress is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8, and an effect corresponding to the AT state (second special effect) is executed.
In addition, a remaining medal count image 62a (in the figure, "100 medals") indicating the number of medals remaining in the AT state is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen of the main display 8, and an executed game count image 62b (in the figure, "100G") indicating the total number of executed games in the bonus state and the AT state is displayed in the right corner of the screen of the main display 8.

As shown in FIG. 50(b), in a game in which the second special effect is being executed (while reel 4 is spinning), if a special replay role is won and an additional lottery is won, the sub-controller 20, based on control information received from the main controller 10, controls the lower part of the AT state image 60b on the screen of the main display 8 to display, as special operation information, a pattern instruction image 52a consisting of text information "Aim for 7" to prompt the player to stop a special pattern combination (special pattern form "7-7-7"), and an operation instruction image 52b indicating that the stopping operation sequence (stopping direction) of reel 4 should be reversed ("5c→5b→5a"), side by side in the left-right direction, and an instruction effect for stopping the special pattern combination is executed.

In other words, if the additional lottery is won when a special replay role is won in a game in which the AT state image 60b is displayed, the same instruction presentation as when the bonus role described above is won (see FIG. 49(b)) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 50(c), when the player stops reel 4 according to the instructions, a bell symbol 54c stops in the middle of the left reel 4a, a replay symbol 54b stops in the middle of the middle reel 4b, and a bell symbol 54c stops in the middle of the right reel 4c, forming a "bell-replay-bell" symbol combination on the pay line (middle line) of reel 4, resulting in a special replay combination.

In the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the arrangement of the symbols on each reel 4 is set so that, as shown in the figure, a bell symbol 54c is arranged above the 7 symbol 54a on the left reel 4a, a replay symbol 54b is arranged above the 7 symbol 54a on the middle reel 4b, and a bell symbol 54c is arranged above the 7 symbol 54a on the right reel 4c.
Therefore, when the symbol combination of "Bell Replay Bell" stops on the active line (on the middle line) by performing the stopping operation according to the instructions, the symbol combination of "7 7 7" will stop on the lower line (the line connecting the symbols in the lower row of each reel 4), which is not an active line.

In other words, when the player performs the stopping operation on reel 4 in accordance with the instructions for stopping the special symbol combination, the special symbol combination will not stop on the pay line, but as the symbol combination of "Bell Replay Bell" stops on the pay line, the special symbol combination will stop on the lower line.
If the reel 4 is stopped by pushing in the reverse direction, but the eye-pushing operation is improper (inaccurate), a symbol other than the 7 symbol 54a will stop on the lower row of the specified reel 4, and the symbol combination of "bell replay bell" will stop on the active line.

When the "Bell Replay Bell" pattern combination stops on reel 4, an addition result image 62 is displayed at the bottom of the screen of main display 8, which includes numerical information of "+50 medals" to indicate that medals have been added to the remaining medal count in the AT state, and an addition performance (bonus awarding performance) is executed.
The numerical information displayed in the addition result image 62 changes depending on the number of medals added.

Therefore, an additional effect is executed as if the number of medals has been increased by stopping a special pattern combination.
Although not shown in the figure, at the start of the next game, the remaining medal number image 62a is updated and displayed by the added amount, and the game in the AT state is executed.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, if a special replay role is won during the AT state in which the performance corresponding to the AT state is being performed, and if the player wins the additional lottery at that time, an instruction performance similar to that when a bonus role is won (when the bonus state is transitioned to) is executed even though the bonus role is not won, and when the stop button 5 is operated to stop the reel 4 according to the instruction performance, a special pattern combination corresponding to the special replay role stops on the active line, and at the same time, a special pattern combination stops on the lower line.
Then, in response to the stopping of a symbol combination corresponding to the special replay role, an additional performance is performed on the main display 8.

In other words, the sub-controller 20, which serves as the bonus-granting effect control means, enables the execution of a bonus-granting effect (additional effect) when a special symbol pattern (special symbol combination) is derived outside the pay area on the variable display means (reel 4), even if the first special condition (winning a bonus role) is not met.

As a result, it is possible to execute an additional bonus effect that makes it seem as if the number of medals has been increased by the stopping of a special symbol combination, making it possible to clearly notify the player that they have won the additional bonus lottery, and further increasing the player's sense of satisfaction.

Furthermore, by making the additional effect common when a special replay role is won and when the bonus state is transitioned to, it is possible for the player to perceive that a predetermined number of medals have been added to the remaining medal count in the AT state, just as when a special replay role is won, when the bonus state is transitioned to.
In other words, the additional effect when transitioning to the bonus state does not actually add to the number of remaining medals in the AT state, but rather makes it appear as if the number of remaining medals awarded upon transition to the bonus state is added to the number of remaining medals in the AT state in a pseudo manner, but it is possible to make the player recognize that an addition has actually been made to the number of remaining medals in the AT state even when transitioning to the bonus state.

In addition, when a special replay role is won, the combination of symbols that stops on the active line when reel 4 is stopped by pressing reel 4 in reverse may be other than those mentioned above, as long as it is a special combination of symbols that stops on the lower line.
In addition, when the "Bell Replay Bell" symbol combination stops, a special symbol combination is stopped on the lower line, but the special symbol combination may be stopped on any line other than the activated line.
As described above, control is performed when a bonus role is won during the AT state in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment.

Although the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment has been described above, the bonus state and the AT state may be of the game number management type as long as the management type is similar.
In addition, after the change to the effect corresponding to the AT state (second special effect), in some cases when the bonus state is won, the effect corresponding to the bonus state (first special effect) may be executed.
In addition, in some cases where a bonus state is won during an AT state directly transitioned to from a normal gaming state, a presentation corresponding to the bonus state (first special presentation) may be executed.

In addition, at the end of a series of special game states (bonus state or AT state), the number of times the bonus state was won during that time may be displayed as a result display, thereby providing the player with an element of guessing the setting value in the probability setting device 14.
In addition, in the case of a bonus state in which the right to transition to the AT state is clearly granted when a bonus role is won, such as when transitioning to the bonus state due to a double win with a special role (e.g., a middle cherry role) that has an extremely low probability of winning, a presentation corresponding to the AT state may be executed immediately after the bonus state ends.
The slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment is configured as described above.

As described above, in the present invention, a gaming machine (slot machine 1) that executes a game based on the player's operation and can generate a special gaming state (AT state) that is advantageous to the player in relation to the execution of the game is provided with a special gaming state control means (main control device 10) that can control the special gaming state to either a first special gaming state (first AT state) in which the special gaming state ends based on the establishment of a predetermined first ending condition, or a second special gaming state (second AT state) in which the special gaming state ends based on the establishment of a second ending condition different from the first ending condition, and the special gaming state control means is configured to include a special gaming state switching control means (main control device 10) that can execute switching control from the first special gaming state to the second special gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition during the first special gaming state.

Therefore, during a special game state, either a first special game state or a second special game state, which have different ending conditions, will occur, making it possible to play a highly entertaining game in which the continuation mode of the special game state changes in various ways.

The special game state control means and the special game state switching control means may be provided by the main control device 10 or the sub-control device 20. Also, they may be configured by the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20 working together.

The special game state switching control means is configured to be able to set the second termination condition for the switched second special game state based on predetermined information that is updated during the first special game state and is related to the establishment of the first termination condition.

Therefore, even when switching between the first special game state and the second special game state is performed, the first special game state and the second special game state can be associated with each other, making it possible to increase interest during the special game state.
Furthermore, since the duration of the second special game state is changed depending on the end time of the first special game state, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the end time of the first special game state. In addition, if the first special game state ends early, the duration of the second special game state is extended, thereby increasing the player's sense of anticipation.

The special game state control means is configured to enable the first end condition to be established based on the number of game media acquired by the player during the first special game state, and to enable the second end condition to be established based on the number of games played during the second special game state.

This makes it possible to clearly distinguish the gameplay characteristics between the first special game state and the second special game state, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of playing during the special game state.

The special game state switching control means is also configured to include a change lottery control means (main control device 10) that can execute a lottery in advance during the first special game state to change the second end condition in the second special game state.

Therefore, in the game during the first special game state, it is possible to increase the interest in the game, and it is also possible to increase the sense of anticipation for both the first special game state and the second special game state.
Furthermore, if the preparation addition lottery is won, it is possible to significantly increase the player's sense of anticipation even before the switch to the second AT state is made.

The change lottery control means may be provided in the main control device 10 or in the sub-control device 20. It may also be configured by the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20 working together.

In addition, the change lottery control means is configured to be able to execute, in a specified game during the first special game state, both a lottery that can change the first end condition in the first special game state, and a lottery that can change the second end condition in the second special game state to which it can be switched.
Therefore, in a game in which both a lottery that can change the first end condition in the first special game state and a lottery that can change the second end condition in the second special game state are held, it is possible to greatly increase the player's sense of anticipation.

The system is also configured to include a bonus awarding means (sub-controller 20) that can award a predetermined bonus if the change lottery control means changes the second ending condition but the game does not switch to the second special game state.

Therefore, even if the second ending condition is changed but the first special game state ends without switching to the second special game state, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction.

The bonus granting means may be provided by the main control device 10 or the sub-control device 20. It may also be configured by the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20 working together.

The system also includes an operation means (stop button 5) that can be operated by a player to derive the result of the game, and a notification control means (sub-control device 20) capable of executing control to notify specific operation information for deriving a specific result as the result of the game, which is information related to the operation of the operation means, and the notification control means is configured to notify the specific operation information with a first probability during the first special game state when a game capable of deriving the specific result is executed, and to notify the specific operation information with a second probability higher than the first probability during the second special game state.

Therefore, it is possible to generate a variety of special game states in which the manner in which specific operation information is notified changes, making the game more entertaining.
Furthermore, when the game state is switched to the second special game state, the probability that specific operation information will be notified is increased compared to the first special game state, so that it is possible to further increase the player's sense of expectation when the game state is switched to the second special game state.
Furthermore, in the first special game state, the player will play while anticipating a switch to the second special game state, which can further increase the player's motivation to play.

The notification control means may be provided in the main control device 10 or in the sub-control device 20. It may also be configured by the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20 working together.

The special game state switching control means is configured to be capable of executing switching control back to the first special game state after switching from the first special game state to the second special game state.

Therefore, the game modes during the special game state can be further diversified, and the entertainment value of the game can be further increased.
Furthermore, since the re-switching to the first special game state occurs upon the end of the second special game state, it is possible to once again increase the motivation of a player who has become disappointed by the end of the second special game state.
Furthermore, the repeated control of the first special game state and the second special game state continues as long as the bonus is added, which can greatly increase the player's sense of expectation.

The special game state control means is configured to be capable of controlling the special game state to a high probability special game state in which the special game state switching control means switches to the second special game state with a high probability based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

Therefore, it is possible to switch to the second special game state in a wider variety of ways, thereby making the game more entertaining.
In addition, when a transition is made to the high probability special game state, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for a longer period of time than when a switching lottery is performed in one game.

On the other hand, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine capable of generating various gaming states as gaming states advantageous to a player.
However, conventional gaming machines have not been sufficient in terms of increasing the entertainment value of the game or enhancing the player's expectations.
In this way, the slot machine 1 of the present invention can solve all or part of the problems that need to be improved in conventional gaming machines.

The above describes a preferred embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention. However, it goes without saying that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the present invention.
For example, in this embodiment, the AT state (AT) is granted as a privilege, but it is also possible to grant ART or RT.

In addition, in this embodiment, the type of AT state is a type that can continue the AT state multiple times in units of a specified number of games, but it may also be a type that ends when there are no more games remaining in the AT state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect button 2d and the upper effect button 2f are exemplified as the effect operation means, but other means that output an input signal in response to the player's operation may be used, such as the bet button 2a, the stop button 5, the start lever 3, etc.

In addition, the front door 1a may be provided with a vibration means for vibrating the front door 1a by activating a motor, speaker, etc., so that the player's sense of anticipation can be heightened by activating the vibration means during various effects such as premonition effects and battle effects, or at specified times during the added-on specialization zone.
In addition, a ventilation means for blowing air toward the player may be provided on the front door 1a, and the ventilation means may be operated during various effects such as premonition effects and battle effects, or at specified times during the added-on specialization zone, in order to heighten the player's sense of anticipation.

In addition, a main display 8 and a sub display 17 are provided as display means, but various effects such as premonition effects and battle effects, and various effects in the added-on specialization zone may be executed on one of the display means, or may be executed on both of the two display means.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the main control unit 10 performed operations as various means such as a lottery means, but the sub-control unit 20 may perform some or all of these operations and operate as the various means.
Conversely, the main control unit 10 can perform some or all of the operations executed by the sub-control unit 20, and the main control unit 10 can operate as various means.

Furthermore, although the present invention is applied to a slot machine, it can also be applied to other gaming machines such as pachinko (for example, ball slot).
The present invention can also be applied to so-called enclosed gaming machines that can execute games using pseudo gaming media in data format, without using actual gaming media such as medals or gaming balls.

1: Slot machine 2: Bet button 4: Reels 5: Stop button 8: Main display 10: Main control device 17: Sub display 20: Sub control device

Claims (1)

A lottery means capable of deriving any one of a plurality of lottery results including a first lottery result and a second lottery result;
A determination means for determining whether to grant a specific benefit based on the lottery result derived by the lottery means;
A variable display means for statically displaying the variable displaying symbol information in a manner based on a lottery result derived by the lottery means in the game in which a game value can be awarded;
a control means for executing the main game after executing a pseudo game in which the game value cannot be awarded when the second lottery result is derived in a predetermined game;
during the pseudo game of the predetermined game and in a state where the identification information is not stopped and displayed by the variable display means, a performance execution means capable of executing a first performance corresponding to the first lottery result;
Equipped with
The control means
In a specific game, when the first lottery result is derived, the game can be executed;
The performance execution means includes:
During the main game of the predetermined game and in a state in which the identification information is not stopped and displayed by the variable display means, a second performance corresponding to the second lottery result can be executed;
During the main game of the specific game and in a state where the identification information is not stopped and displayed by the variable display means, a first performance corresponding to the first lottery result can be executed;
The determination means is
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to determine that a specific benefit will be awarded with a higher probability when the second lottery result is derived in the specified game than when the first lottery result is derived in the specific game.

Images